|
428
|
1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
|
|
2 %
|
|
|
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
|
|
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
|
|
5 %
|
|
|
6 \def\texinfoversion{1999-09-25.10}
|
|
|
7 %
|
|
|
8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
|
|
|
9 % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
|
10 %
|
|
|
11 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
|
|
12 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
|
|
13 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
|
|
|
14 % your option) any later version.
|
|
|
15 %
|
|
|
16 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
|
|
17 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
|
|
18 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
|
|
19 % General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
20 %
|
|
|
21 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
|
22 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
|
|
|
23 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
|
|
|
24 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
|
|
|
25 %
|
|
|
26 % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
|
|
|
27 % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
|
|
|
28 % what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
|
|
|
29 %
|
|
|
30 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
|
|
31 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
|
|
32 % ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
|
|
|
33 % (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
|
|
|
34 % ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
|
|
35 % ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
|
|
|
36 % (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list).
|
|
|
37 % /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
|
|
|
38 % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
|
|
|
39 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
|
|
40 % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/.
|
|
|
41 %
|
|
|
42 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
|
|
43 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
|
|
44 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
|
|
45 %
|
|
|
46 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
|
|
47 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
|
|
48 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
|
|
49 % tex foo.texi
|
|
|
50 % texindex foo.??
|
|
|
51 % tex foo.texi
|
|
|
52 % tex foo.texi
|
|
|
53 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
|
|
|
54 % The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
|
|
|
55 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
|
|
56 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
|
|
57 %
|
|
|
58 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get
|
|
|
59 % the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
|
|
|
60
|
|
|
61 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
|
|
62
|
|
|
63 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
|
|
64 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
|
|
65 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
|
|
66 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
|
|
67 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
|
|
68
|
|
|
69 % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
|
|
|
70 \let\ptexb=\b
|
|
|
71 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
|
|
72 \let\ptexc=\c
|
|
|
73 \let\ptexcomma=\,
|
|
|
74 \let\ptexdot=\.
|
|
|
75 \let\ptexdots=\dots
|
|
|
76 \let\ptexend=\end
|
|
|
77 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
|
|
78 \let\ptexexclam=\!
|
|
|
79 \let\ptexi=\i
|
|
|
80 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
|
|
81 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
|
|
82 \let\ptexstar=\*
|
|
|
83 \let\ptext=\t
|
|
|
84
|
|
|
85 % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
|
|
|
86 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
|
|
87 \let\+ = \relax
|
|
|
88
|
|
|
89 \message{Basics,}
|
|
|
90 \chardef\other=12
|
|
|
91
|
|
|
92 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
|
|
93 % starts a new line in the output.
|
|
|
94 \newlinechar = `^^J
|
|
|
95
|
|
|
96 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
|
|
97 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
|
|
98 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
|
|
99 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
|
|
100 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
|
|
101 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
|
|
102 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
|
|
103 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
|
|
104 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
|
|
105 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
|
|
106 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
|
|
107 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
|
|
108 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
|
|
109 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
|
|
110 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
|
|
111 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
|
|
112 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
|
|
113 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
|
|
114 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
|
|
115 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
|
|
116 %
|
|
|
117 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
|
|
118 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
|
|
119 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
|
|
120 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
|
|
121 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
|
|
122 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
|
|
123 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
|
|
124 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
|
|
125 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
|
|
126 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
|
|
127 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
|
|
128 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
|
|
129 %
|
|
|
130 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
|
|
131 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
|
|
132 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
|
|
133 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
|
|
134 \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
|
|
|
135 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
|
|
136 \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
|
|
|
137
|
|
|
138 % Ignore a token.
|
|
|
139 %
|
|
|
140 \def\gobble#1{}
|
|
|
141
|
|
|
142 \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
|
|
|
143 \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
|
|
|
144 \hyphenation{eshell}
|
|
|
145 \hyphenation{white-space}
|
|
|
146
|
|
|
147 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
|
|
148 \newdimen \bindingoffset
|
|
|
149 \newdimen \normaloffset
|
|
|
150 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
|
|
151
|
|
|
152 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
|
|
153 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
|
|
154 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
|
|
|
155 %
|
|
|
156 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
|
|
157 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
|
|
158 \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
|
|
|
159 \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
|
|
160 \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
|
|
161 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
|
|
162 }%
|
|
|
163 \else
|
|
|
164 \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
|
|
|
165 \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
|
|
166 \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
|
|
167 \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
|
|
|
168 \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
|
|
|
169 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
|
|
170 }%
|
|
|
171 \fi
|
|
|
172
|
|
|
173 % For @cropmarks command.
|
|
|
174 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
|
|
175 %
|
|
|
176 \newif\ifcropmarks
|
|
|
177 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
|
|
178 %
|
|
|
179 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
|
|
180 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
|
|
181 %
|
|
|
182 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
|
|
183 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
|
|
184 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
|
|
185 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
|
|
186
|
|
|
187 % Main output routine.
|
|
|
188 \chardef\PAGE = 255
|
|
|
189 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
|
|
190
|
|
|
191 \newbox\headlinebox
|
|
|
192 \newbox\footlinebox
|
|
|
193
|
|
|
194 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
|
|
195 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
|
|
196 \def\onepageout#1{%
|
|
|
197 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
|
|
198 %
|
|
|
199 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
|
|
200 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
|
|
201 %
|
|
|
202 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
|
|
203 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
|
|
204 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
|
|
205 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
|
|
206 %
|
|
|
207 {%
|
|
|
208 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
|
|
209 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
|
|
210 % before the \shipout runs.
|
|
|
211 %
|
|
|
212 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
|
|
213 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
|
|
214 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
|
|
215 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
|
|
216 \shipout\vbox{%
|
|
|
217 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
|
|
218 \hsize = \outerhsize
|
|
|
219 \vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
|
|
220 \vtop to0pt{%
|
|
|
221 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
|
|
222 \nointerlineskip
|
|
|
223 \line{%
|
|
|
224 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|
|
225 \hfill
|
|
|
226 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|
|
227 }%
|
|
|
228 \vss}%
|
|
|
229 \vskip\topandbottommargin
|
|
|
230 \line\bgroup
|
|
|
231 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
|
|
232 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
|
|
233 \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
234 \fi
|
|
|
235 %
|
|
|
236 \unvbox\headlinebox
|
|
|
237 \pagebody{#1}%
|
|
|
238 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
|
|
239 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
|
|
240 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
|
|
|
241 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
|
|
242 \vskip 2\baselineskip
|
|
|
243 \unvbox\footlinebox
|
|
|
244 \fi
|
|
|
245 %
|
|
|
246 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
|
|
|
247 %
|
|
|
248 \ifcropmarks
|
|
|
249 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
250 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
|
|
251 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
|
|
252 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
|
|
253 \vbox to0pt{\vss
|
|
|
254 \line{%
|
|
|
255 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|
|
256 \hfill
|
|
|
257 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|
|
258 }%
|
|
|
259 \nointerlineskip
|
|
|
260 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
|
|
261 }%
|
|
|
262 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
|
|
263 \fi
|
|
|
264 }% end of \shipout\vbox
|
|
|
265 }% end of group with \turnoffactive
|
|
|
266 \advancepageno
|
|
|
267 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
|
|
268 }
|
|
|
269
|
|
|
270 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
|
|
271
|
|
|
272 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
|
|
273 {\catcode`\@ =11
|
|
|
274 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
|
|
275 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
|
|
276 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
|
|
277 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
|
|
278 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
|
|
|
279 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
|
|
280 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
|
|
281 }
|
|
|
282
|
|
|
283 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
|
|
284 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
|
|
285 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
|
|
286 %
|
|
|
287 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
|
|
288 \def\nstop{\vbox
|
|
|
289 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
|
|
290 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
|
|
291 \def\nsbot{\vbox
|
|
|
292 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
|
|
293
|
|
|
294 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
|
|
295 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
|
|
296 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
|
|
297 %
|
|
|
298 \def\parsearg#1{%
|
|
|
299 \let\next = #1%
|
|
|
300 \begingroup
|
|
|
301 \obeylines
|
|
|
302 \futurelet\temp\parseargx
|
|
|
303 }
|
|
|
304
|
|
|
305 % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
|
|
|
306 % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
|
|
|
307 \def\parseargx{%
|
|
|
308 % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
|
|
|
309 \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
|
|
|
310 \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
|
|
|
311 \else
|
|
|
312 \expandafter\parseargline
|
|
|
313 \fi
|
|
|
314 }
|
|
|
315
|
|
|
316 % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
|
|
|
317 {\obeyspaces %
|
|
|
318 \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
|
|
|
319
|
|
|
320 {\obeylines %
|
|
|
321 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
|
|
322 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
|
|
323 %
|
|
|
324 % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
|
|
|
325 % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
|
|
|
326 \argremovec #1\c\relax %
|
|
|
327 \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
|
|
|
328 %
|
|
|
329 % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
|
|
|
330 \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
331 }%
|
|
|
332 }
|
|
|
333
|
|
|
334 % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
|
|
|
335 % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
|
|
|
336 % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
|
|
|
337 % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
|
|
|
338 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
|
|
339 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
|
|
340
|
|
|
341 % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
|
|
|
342 % @end itemize @c foo
|
|
|
343 % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
|
|
|
344 % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
|
|
|
345 % result to \toks0.
|
|
|
346 %
|
|
|
347 % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
|
|
|
348 % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
|
|
|
349 % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
|
|
|
350 % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
|
|
|
351 % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
|
|
|
352 % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
|
|
|
353 % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
|
|
|
354 %
|
|
|
355 \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
|
|
|
356 \begingroup
|
|
|
357 \ignoreactivespaces
|
|
|
358 \edef\temp{#1}%
|
|
|
359 \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
|
|
|
360 \endgroup
|
|
|
361 }
|
|
|
362
|
|
|
363 % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
|
|
|
364 %
|
|
|
365 \begingroup
|
|
|
366 \obeyspaces
|
|
|
367 \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
|
|
|
368 \endgroup
|
|
|
369
|
|
|
370
|
|
|
371 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
|
|
372
|
|
|
373 %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
|
|
|
374 %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
|
|
|
375 \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
|
|
|
376 \def\ENVcheck{%
|
|
|
377 \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
|
|
|
378 \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
|
|
|
379
|
|
|
380 % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
|
|
|
381 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
|
|
382
|
|
|
383 \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
|
|
|
384
|
|
|
385 \def\beginxxx #1{%
|
|
|
386 \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
387 {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
|
|
|
388 \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
|
|
|
389
|
|
|
390 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
|
|
391 %
|
|
|
392 \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
|
|
|
393 \def\endxxx #1{%
|
|
|
394 \removeactivespaces{#1}%
|
|
|
395 \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
396 %
|
|
|
397 \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
398 \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
399 % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
|
|
|
400 \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
|
401 \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
|
|
|
402 \else
|
|
|
403 \unmatchedenderror\endthing
|
|
|
404 \fi
|
|
|
405 \else
|
|
|
406 % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
|
|
|
407 \csname E\endthing\endcsname
|
|
|
408 \fi
|
|
|
409 }
|
|
|
410
|
|
|
411 % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
|
|
|
412 %
|
|
|
413 \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
|
|
|
414 \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
|
415 \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
|
|
|
416 }
|
|
|
417
|
|
|
418 % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
|
|
|
419 %
|
|
|
420 \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
|
|
|
421 \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
|
|
|
422 }
|
|
|
423
|
|
|
424
|
|
|
425 % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
|
|
|
426 % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
|
|
|
427 \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
|
|
|
428 \def\singlespace{%
|
|
|
429 % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
|
|
|
430 % environments. --karl, 6may93
|
|
|
431 %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
|
|
|
432 %\kern \baselineskip}%
|
|
|
433 \setleading \singlespaceskip
|
|
|
434 }
|
|
|
435
|
|
|
436 %% Simple single-character @ commands
|
|
|
437
|
|
|
438 % @@ prints an @
|
|
|
439 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
|
|
440 \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
|
|
441
|
|
|
442 % This is turned off because it was never documented
|
|
|
443 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
|
|
444 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
|
|
445 %% but suppressing ligatures.
|
|
|
446 %\def\`{{`}}
|
|
|
447 %\def\'{{'}}
|
|
|
448
|
|
|
449 % Used to generate quoted braces.
|
|
|
450 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
|
|
451 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
|
|
452 \let\{=\mylbrace
|
|
|
453 \let\}=\myrbrace
|
|
|
454 \begingroup
|
|
|
455 % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
|
|
|
456 \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
|
|
|
457 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
|
|
458 \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
|
|
|
459 @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
|
|
|
460 @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
|
|
|
461 @endgroup
|
|
|
462
|
|
|
463 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
|
|
464 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
|
|
|
465 \let\, = \c
|
|
|
466 \let\dotaccent = \.
|
|
|
467 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
|
|
468 \let\tieaccent = \t
|
|
|
469 \let\ubaraccent = \b
|
|
|
470 \let\udotaccent = \d
|
|
|
471
|
|
|
472 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
|
|
|
473 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
|
|
|
474 \def\questiondown{?`}
|
|
|
475 \def\exclamdown{!`}
|
|
|
476
|
|
|
477 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
|
|
478 \def\imacro{i}
|
|
|
479 \def\jmacro{j}
|
|
|
480 \def\dotless#1{%
|
|
|
481 \def\temp{#1}%
|
|
|
482 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
|
|
|
483 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
|
|
|
484 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
|
|
485 \fi\fi
|
|
|
486 }
|
|
|
487
|
|
|
488 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
|
|
489 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
|
|
490 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
|
|
491 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
|
|
492 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
|
|
493 {\catcode`@ = 11
|
|
|
494 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
|
|
495 % if the definition is written into an index file.
|
|
|
496 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
|
|
497 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
|
|
498 }
|
|
|
499
|
|
|
500 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
|
|
501 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
|
|
502
|
|
|
503 % @* forces a line break.
|
|
|
504 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
|
|
505
|
|
|
506 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
|
|
507 \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
|
|
|
508
|
|
|
509 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
|
|
510 \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
|
|
|
511
|
|
|
512 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
|
|
513 \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
|
|
|
514
|
|
|
515 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
|
|
516 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
|
|
517 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
|
|
518 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
|
|
519
|
|
|
520 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
|
|
521 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
|
|
522 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
|
|
523 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
|
|
524 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
|
|
525 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
|
|
526 % the text is small, which looks bad.
|
|
|
527 %
|
|
|
528 \def\group{\begingroup
|
|
|
529 \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
|
|
|
530 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
|
|
531 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
|
|
532 \fi
|
|
|
533 %
|
|
|
534 % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
|
|
|
535 % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
|
|
|
536 % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
|
|
|
537 % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
|
|
538 % above. But it's pretty close.
|
|
|
539 \def\Egroup{%
|
|
|
540 \egroup % End the \vtop.
|
|
|
541 \endgroup % End the \group.
|
|
|
542 }%
|
|
|
543 %
|
|
|
544 \vtop\bgroup
|
|
|
545 % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
|
|
|
546 % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
|
|
|
547 % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
|
|
|
548 % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
|
|
|
549 % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
|
|
|
550 % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
|
|
|
551 \everypar = {\strut}%
|
|
|
552 %
|
|
|
553 % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
|
|
|
554 % normal interline spacing.
|
|
|
555 \offinterlineskip
|
|
|
556 %
|
|
|
557 % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
|
|
|
558 % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
|
|
|
559 % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
|
|
|
560 % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
|
|
|
561 % empty paragraph.
|
|
|
562 \ifx\par\lisppar
|
|
|
563 \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
|
|
|
564 %
|
|
|
565 % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
|
|
|
566 \obeylines
|
|
|
567 \fi
|
|
|
568 %
|
|
|
569 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
|
|
570 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
|
|
571 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
|
|
572 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
|
|
573 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
|
|
574 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
|
|
575 \comment
|
|
|
576 }
|
|
|
577 %
|
|
|
578 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
|
|
579 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
|
|
580 %
|
|
|
581 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
|
|
582 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
|
|
583 where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
|
|
584
|
|
|
585 % @need space-in-mils
|
|
|
586 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
|
|
587
|
|
|
588 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
|
|
589
|
|
|
590 \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
|
|
|
591
|
|
|
592 % Old definition--didn't work.
|
|
|
593 %\def\needx #1{\par %
|
|
|
594 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
|
|
595 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
|
|
596 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
|
|
597 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
|
|
598 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
|
|
599 %}}
|
|
|
600
|
|
|
601 \def\needx#1{%
|
|
|
602 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
|
|
603 % paragraph.
|
|
|
604 \par
|
|
|
605 %
|
|
|
606 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
|
|
607 \dimen0 = #1\mil
|
|
|
608 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
|
|
609 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
|
|
610 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|
|
611 %
|
|
|
612 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
|
|
613 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
|
|
614 % And a page break here is fine.
|
|
|
615 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
|
|
616 %
|
|
|
617 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
|
|
618 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
|
|
619 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
|
|
620 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
|
|
621 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
|
|
622 %
|
|
|
623 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
|
|
624 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
|
|
625 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
|
|
626 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
|
|
627 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
|
|
628 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
|
|
629 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
|
|
630 \penalty9999
|
|
|
631 %
|
|
|
632 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
|
|
633 \kern -#1\mil
|
|
|
634 %
|
|
|
635 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
|
|
636 \nobreak
|
|
|
637 \fi
|
|
|
638 }
|
|
|
639
|
|
|
640 % @br forces paragraph break
|
|
|
641
|
|
|
642 \let\br = \par
|
|
|
643
|
|
|
644 % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
|
|
|
645 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
|
|
|
646 % font as three actual period characters.
|
|
|
647 %
|
|
|
648 \def\dots{%
|
|
|
649 \leavevmode
|
|
|
650 \hbox to 1.5em{%
|
|
|
651 \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
|
|
652 .\hss.\hss.%
|
|
|
653 \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
|
|
654 }%
|
|
|
655 }
|
|
|
656
|
|
|
657 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
|
|
658 %
|
|
|
659 \def\enddots{%
|
|
|
660 \leavevmode
|
|
|
661 \hbox to 2em{%
|
|
|
662 \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
|
|
663 .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
|
|
|
664 \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
|
|
665 }%
|
|
|
666 \spacefactor=3000
|
|
|
667 }
|
|
|
668
|
|
|
669
|
|
|
670 % @page forces the start of a new page
|
|
|
671 %
|
|
|
672 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|
|
673
|
|
|
674 % @exdent text....
|
|
|
675 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
|
|
676
|
|
|
677 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
|
|
678 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
|
|
679 \newskip\exdentamount
|
|
|
680
|
|
|
681 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
|
|
682 \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
|
|
|
683 \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
|
|
684
|
|
|
685 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
|
|
686 \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
|
|
|
687 \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
|
|
688 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
|
|
689
|
|
|
690 % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
|
|
|
691
|
|
|
692 \def\inmargin#1{%
|
|
|
693 \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
|
|
|
694 \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
|
|
|
695 \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
|
|
|
696 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
|
|
697 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
|
|
698
|
|
|
699 %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
|
|
700
|
|
|
701 % @include file insert text of that file as input.
|
|
|
702 % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
|
|
|
703 \def\include{\begingroup
|
|
|
704 \catcode`\\=12
|
|
|
705 \catcode`~=12
|
|
|
706 \catcode`^=12
|
|
|
707 \catcode`_=12
|
|
|
708 \catcode`|=12
|
|
|
709 \catcode`<=12
|
|
|
710 \catcode`>=12
|
|
|
711 \catcode`+=12
|
|
|
712 \parsearg\includezzz}
|
|
|
713 % Restore active chars for included file.
|
|
|
714 \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
|
|
|
715 % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
|
|
|
716 \def\thisfile{#1}%
|
|
|
717 \input\thisfile
|
|
|
718 \endgroup}
|
|
|
719
|
|
|
720 \def\thisfile{}
|
|
|
721
|
|
|
722 % @center line outputs that line, centered
|
|
|
723
|
|
|
724 \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
|
|
|
725 \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
|
|
726 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|
|
727 \centerline{#1}}}
|
|
|
728
|
|
|
729 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
|
|
730
|
|
|
731 \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
|
|
|
732 \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
|
|
733
|
|
|
734 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
|
|
735 % @c is the same as @comment
|
|
|
736 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
|
|
737
|
|
|
738 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
|
|
739 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
|
|
740 \commentxxx}
|
|
|
741 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
|
|
742
|
|
|
743 \let\c=\comment
|
|
|
744
|
|
|
745 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
|
|
746 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
|
|
747 % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
|
|
748 %
|
|
|
749 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
|
|
750 \def\noneword{none}
|
|
|
751 %
|
|
|
752 \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
|
|
|
753 \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
|
|
|
754 \def\temp{#1}%
|
|
|
755 \ifx\temp\asisword
|
|
|
756 \else
|
|
|
757 \ifx\temp\noneword
|
|
|
758 \defaultparindent = 0pt
|
|
|
759 \else
|
|
|
760 \defaultparindent = #1em
|
|
|
761 \fi
|
|
|
762 \fi
|
|
|
763 \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|
|
764 }
|
|
|
765
|
|
|
766 % @exampleindent NCHARS
|
|
|
767 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
|
|
768 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
|
|
769 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
|
|
770 \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
|
|
|
771 \def\doexampleindent#1{%
|
|
|
772 \def\temp{#1}%
|
|
|
773 \ifx\temp\asisword
|
|
|
774 \else
|
|
|
775 \ifx\temp\noneword
|
|
|
776 \lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
|
|
777 \else
|
|
|
778 \lispnarrowing = #1em
|
|
|
779 \fi
|
|
|
780 \fi
|
|
|
781 }
|
|
|
782
|
|
|
783 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
|
|
784 %
|
|
|
785 \def\asis#1{#1}
|
|
|
786
|
|
|
787 % @math means output in math mode.
|
|
|
788 % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
|
|
|
789 % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then,
|
|
|
790 % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
|
|
|
791 % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a
|
|
|
792 % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
|
|
|
793 %
|
|
|
794 % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
|
|
|
795 % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
|
|
|
796 %
|
|
|
797 \let\implicitmath = $
|
|
|
798 \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
|
|
|
799
|
|
|
800 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
|
|
|
801 \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
|
|
|
802 \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
|
|
|
803
|
|
|
804 % @refill is a no-op.
|
|
|
805 \let\refill=\relax
|
|
|
806
|
|
|
807 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
|
|
808 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
|
|
809 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
|
|
810 %
|
|
|
811 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
|
|
812 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
|
|
813
|
|
|
814 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
|
|
815 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
|
|
816 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
|
|
817 \def\setfilename{%
|
|
|
818 \iflinks
|
|
|
819 \readauxfile
|
|
|
820 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
|
|
821 \openindices
|
|
|
822 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
|
|
823 \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
|
|
824 %
|
|
|
825 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
|
|
826 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
|
|
827 % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
|
|
|
828 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
|
|
829 \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
|
|
|
830 \closein1
|
|
|
831 \temp
|
|
|
832 %
|
|
|
833 \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
|
|
834 }
|
|
|
835
|
|
|
836 % Called from \setfilename.
|
|
|
837 %
|
|
|
838 \def\openindices{%
|
|
|
839 \newindex{cp}%
|
|
|
840 \newcodeindex{fn}%
|
|
|
841 \newcodeindex{vr}%
|
|
|
842 \newcodeindex{tp}%
|
|
|
843 \newcodeindex{ky}%
|
|
|
844 \newcodeindex{pg}%
|
|
|
845 }
|
|
|
846
|
|
|
847 % @bye.
|
|
|
848 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
|
|
849
|
|
|
850
|
|
|
851 \message{pdf,}
|
|
|
852 % adobe `portable' document format
|
|
|
853 \newcount\tempnum
|
|
|
854 \newcount\lnkcount
|
|
|
855 \newtoks\filename
|
|
|
856 \newcount\filenamelength
|
|
|
857 \newcount\pgn
|
|
|
858 \newtoks\toksA
|
|
|
859 \newtoks\toksB
|
|
|
860 \newtoks\toksC
|
|
|
861 \newtoks\toksD
|
|
|
862 \newbox\boxA
|
|
|
863 \newcount\countA
|
|
|
864 \newif\ifpdf
|
|
|
865 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
|
|
866
|
|
|
867 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
|
|
868 \pdffalse
|
|
|
869 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
|
|
870 \let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
|
|
871 \let\endlink = \relax
|
|
|
872 \let\linkcolor = \relax
|
|
|
873 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
|
|
874 \else
|
|
|
875 \pdftrue
|
|
|
876 \pdfoutput = 1
|
|
|
877 \input pdfcolor
|
|
|
878 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
879 \def\imagewidth{#2}%
|
|
|
880 \def\imageheight{#3}%
|
|
|
881 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|
|
882 \pdfimage
|
|
|
883 \else
|
|
|
884 \pdfximage
|
|
|
885 \fi
|
|
|
886 \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
|
|
|
887 \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
|
|
|
888 {#1.pdf}%
|
|
|
889 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
|
|
890 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
|
|
891 \fi}
|
|
|
892 \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz}
|
|
|
893 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@}
|
|
|
894 \let\linkcolor = \Cyan
|
|
|
895 \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
|
|
|
896 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
|
|
897 % come from Petr Olsak
|
|
|
898 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
|
|
899 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
|
|
900 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
|
|
901 \advance\tempnum by1
|
|
|
902 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
|
|
903 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
|
|
|
904 \openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
|
|
905 \ifeof 1\else\bgroup
|
|
|
906 \closein 1
|
|
|
907 \indexnofonts
|
|
|
908 \def\tt{}
|
|
|
909 % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
|
|
910 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
|
|
911 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
|
|
912 %
|
|
|
913 \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
|
|
|
914 \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
915 \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
|
|
|
916 \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
917 \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
|
|
|
918 \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
919 \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
|
|
|
920 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
921 \input \jobname.toc
|
|
|
922 \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
|
|
|
923 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
|
|
|
924 \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
|
|
|
925 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
|
|
|
926 \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
|
927 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
|
|
|
928 \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{%
|
|
|
929 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
|
|
|
930 \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
|
|
|
931 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
|
|
|
932 \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{%
|
|
|
933 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
|
|
|
934 \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
|
|
|
935 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
|
|
|
936 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{%
|
|
|
937 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
|
|
|
938 \input \jobname.toc
|
|
|
939 \egroup\fi
|
|
|
940 }}
|
|
|
941 \def\makelinks #1,{%
|
|
|
942 \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
|
|
|
943 \ifx\params\E
|
|
|
944 \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
|
|
|
945 \else
|
|
|
946 \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
|
|
|
947 \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
|
|
|
948 \picknum{#1}%
|
|
|
949 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
|
|
|
950 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
|
|
|
951 \linkcolor #1%
|
|
|
952 \advance\lnkcount by 1%
|
|
|
953 \endlink
|
|
|
954 \fi
|
|
|
955 \nextmakelinks
|
|
|
956 }
|
|
|
957 \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
|
|
|
958 \def\pn#1{%
|
|
|
959 \def\p{#1}%
|
|
|
960 \ifx\p\lbrace
|
|
|
961 \let\nextpn=\ppn
|
|
|
962 \else
|
|
|
963 \let\nextpn=\ppnn
|
|
|
964 \def\first{#1}
|
|
|
965 \fi
|
|
|
966 \nextpn
|
|
|
967 }
|
|
|
968 \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
|
|
|
969 \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
|
|
|
970 \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
|
|
|
971 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
|
|
972 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
|
|
973 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
|
|
974 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
|
|
975 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
|
|
976 \advance\filenamelength by 1
|
|
|
977 \fi
|
|
|
978 \fi
|
|
|
979 \nextsp}
|
|
|
980 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
|
|
981 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|
|
982 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
|
|
983 \else
|
|
|
984 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
|
|
985 \fi
|
|
|
986 \def\pdfurl#1{%
|
|
|
987 \begingroup
|
|
|
988 \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
|
|
|
989 \leavevmode\Red
|
|
|
990 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|
|
991 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
|
|
992 % #1
|
|
|
993 \endgroup}
|
|
|
994 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
|
|
995 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
|
|
996 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
|
|
997 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
|
|
998 \def\maketoks{%
|
|
|
999 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
|
|
|
1000 \ifx\first0\adn0
|
|
|
1001 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
|
|
1002 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
|
|
1003 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
|
|
1004 \else
|
|
|
1005 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
|
|
1006 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
|
|
1007 \let\next=\maketoks
|
|
|
1008 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
|
|
1009 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
|
|
1010 \fi
|
|
|
1011 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|
|
1012 \next}
|
|
|
1013 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
|
|
1014 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
|
|
1015 \def\pdflink#1{%
|
|
|
1016 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}}
|
|
|
1017 \linkcolor #1\endlink}
|
|
|
1018 \def\mkpgn#1{#1@}
|
|
|
1019 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
|
|
1020 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
|
|
1021
|
|
|
1022
|
|
|
1023 \message{fonts,}
|
|
|
1024 % Font-change commands.
|
|
|
1025
|
|
|
1026 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
|
|
1027 % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
|
|
|
1028 \newfam\sffam
|
|
|
1029 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
|
|
|
1030 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
|
|
1031
|
|
|
1032 % We don't need math for this one.
|
|
|
1033 \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
|
|
|
1034
|
|
|
1035 % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
|
|
|
1036 \newcount\mainmagstep
|
|
|
1037 \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
|
|
|
1038
|
|
|
1039 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
|
|
1040 % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
|
|
1041 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
|
|
|
1042 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
|
|
|
1043
|
|
|
1044 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
|
|
1045 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
|
|
1046 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
|
|
1047 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
|
|
1048 \def\fontprefix{cm}
|
|
|
1049 \fi
|
|
|
1050 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
|
|
1051 \def\rmshape{r}
|
|
|
1052 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
|
|
1053 \def\bfshape{b}
|
|
|
1054 \def\bxshape{bx}
|
|
|
1055 \def\ttshape{tt}
|
|
|
1056 \def\ttbshape{tt}
|
|
|
1057 \def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
|
|
1058 \def\itshape{ti}
|
|
|
1059 \def\itbshape{bxti}
|
|
|
1060 \def\slshape{sl}
|
|
|
1061 \def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
|
|
1062 \def\sfshape{ss}
|
|
|
1063 \def\sfbshape{ss}
|
|
|
1064 \def\scshape{csc}
|
|
|
1065 \def\scbshape{csc}
|
|
|
1066
|
|
|
1067 \ifx\bigger\relax
|
|
|
1068 \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
|
|
|
1069 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1070 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1071 \else
|
|
|
1072 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1073 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1074 \fi
|
|
|
1075 % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
|
|
|
1076 % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
|
|
|
1077 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
|
|
|
1078 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1079 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1080 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1081 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1082 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1083 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
|
1084 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|
|
1085 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|
|
1086
|
|
|
1087 % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
|
|
|
1088 \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
|
|
|
1089 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1090 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
|
|
|
1091
|
|
|
1092 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
|
|
1093 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1094 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1095 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
|
|
|
1096 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1097 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1098 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
|
|
|
1099 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
|
|
|
1100 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
|
|
|
1101 \font\smalli=cmmi9
|
|
|
1102 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|
|
1103
|
|
|
1104 % Fonts for title page:
|
|
|
1105 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1106 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1107 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1108 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1109 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1110 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1111 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|
|
1112 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
|
1113 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|
|
1114 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|
|
1115 \def\authorrm{\secrm}
|
|
|
1116
|
|
|
1117 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
|
|
1118 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1119 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1120 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1121 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1122 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1123 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
|
|
|
1124 \let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
|
|
1125 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
|
1126 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
|
|
1127 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
|
|
1128
|
|
|
1129 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
|
|
1130 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1131 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1132 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1133 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1134 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1135 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1136 \let\secbf\secrm
|
|
|
1137 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
|
1138 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|
|
1139 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|
|
1140
|
|
|
1141 % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad.
|
|
|
1142 % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded.
|
|
|
1143 % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1144 % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1145 % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1146
|
|
|
1147 %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
|
|
|
1148 %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than
|
|
|
1149 %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1.
|
|
|
1150 %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1151 %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1152
|
|
|
1153 %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
|
|
|
1154
|
|
|
1155 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
|
|
1156 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
|
1157 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1158 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1159 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
|
1160 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
|
|
|
1161 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
|
1162 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|
|
1163 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
|
1164 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
|
|
1165 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
|
|
1166 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
|
|
|
1167 % but that is not a standard magnification.
|
|
|
1168
|
|
|
1169 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
|
|
1170 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
|
|
1171 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
|
|
|
1172 % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
|
|
|
1173 % also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
|
|
1174 %
|
|
|
1175 \def\resetmathfonts{%
|
|
|
1176 \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
|
|
|
1177 \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
|
|
|
1178 \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
|
|
|
1179 }
|
|
|
1180
|
|
|
1181
|
|
|
1182 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
|
|
1183 % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
|
|
|
1184 % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
|
|
|
1185 % cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
|
|
|
1186 % \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
|
|
|
1187 % redefine \bf itself.
|
|
|
1188 \def\textfonts{%
|
|
|
1189 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
|
|
1190 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
|
|
1191 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
|
|
1192 \resetmathfonts}
|
|
|
1193 \def\titlefonts{%
|
|
|
1194 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
|
|
1195 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
|
|
1196 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
|
|
1197 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
|
|
1198 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
|
|
1199 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
|
|
1200 \def\chapfonts{%
|
|
|
1201 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
|
|
1202 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
|
|
1203 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
|
|
1204 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
|
|
1205 \def\secfonts{%
|
|
|
1206 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
|
|
1207 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
|
|
1208 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
|
|
1209 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
|
|
1210 \def\subsecfonts{%
|
|
|
1211 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
|
|
1212 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
|
|
1213 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
|
|
1214 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
|
|
1215 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
|
|
|
1216 \def\smallfonts{%
|
|
|
1217 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
|
|
1218 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
|
|
1219 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
|
|
1220 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
|
|
1221 \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
|
|
|
1222
|
|
|
1223 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
|
|
1224 %
|
|
|
1225 \textfonts
|
|
|
1226
|
|
|
1227 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
|
|
1228 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
|
|
1229 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
|
|
1230
|
|
|
1231 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
|
|
1232 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
|
|
1233
|
|
|
1234 % Fonts for short table of contents.
|
|
|
1235 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1236 \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1237 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
1238
|
|
|
1239 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
|
|
1240 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
|
|
1241
|
|
|
1242 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
|
|
1243 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
|
|
1244 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
1245 \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
|
1246 \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
|
1247
|
|
|
1248 \let\i=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1249 \let\var=\smartslanted
|
|
|
1250 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
|
|
1251 \let\emph=\smartitalic
|
|
|
1252 \let\cite=\smartslanted
|
|
|
1253
|
|
|
1254 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
|
|
1255 \let\strong=\b
|
|
|
1256
|
|
|
1257 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
|
|
1258 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
|
|
1259 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
|
|
1260 %
|
|
|
1261 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
|
|
1262 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
|
|
1263
|
|
|
1264 \def\t#1{%
|
|
|
1265 {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
|
|
|
1266 \null
|
|
|
1267 }
|
|
|
1268 \let\ttfont=\t
|
|
|
1269 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
|
|
|
1270 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
|
|
1271 \font\keysy=cmsy9
|
|
|
1272 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
|
|
1273 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
|
|
1274 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
|
|
1275 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
|
|
1276 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
|
|
1277 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
|
|
1278 % The old definition, with no lozenge:
|
|
|
1279 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
|
|
|
1280 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
|
|
1281
|
|
|
1282 % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
|
|
1283 \let\file=\samp
|
|
|
1284 \let\option=\samp
|
|
|
1285
|
|
|
1286 % @code is a modification of @t,
|
|
|
1287 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
|
|
1288 \def\tclose#1{%
|
|
|
1289 {%
|
|
|
1290 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
|
|
1291 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
|
|
1292 %
|
|
|
1293 % Switch to typewriter.
|
|
|
1294 \tt
|
|
|
1295 %
|
|
|
1296 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
|
|
1297 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
|
|
1298 %
|
|
|
1299 % Turn off hyphenation.
|
|
|
1300 \nohyphenation
|
|
|
1301 %
|
|
|
1302 \rawbackslash
|
|
|
1303 \frenchspacing
|
|
|
1304 #1%
|
|
|
1305 }%
|
|
|
1306 \null
|
|
|
1307 }
|
|
|
1308
|
|
|
1309 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
|
|
|
1310 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
|
|
1311 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
|
|
1312
|
|
|
1313 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
|
|
1314 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
|
|
1315 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
|
|
1316 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
|
|
1317 % -- rms.
|
|
|
1318 {
|
|
|
1319 \catcode`\-=\active
|
|
|
1320 \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
|
1321 %
|
|
|
1322 \global\def\code{\begingroup
|
|
|
1323 \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
|
|
|
1324 \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
|
|
|
1325 \codex
|
|
|
1326 }
|
|
|
1327 %
|
|
|
1328 % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
|
|
|
1329 % just treat them as a normal -.
|
|
|
1330 \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
|
|
|
1331 }
|
|
|
1332
|
|
|
1333 \def\realdash{-}
|
|
|
1334 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
|
|
1335 \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
|
|
|
1336 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
|
|
1337
|
|
|
1338 %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary
|
|
|
1339
|
|
|
1340 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
|
|
1341 % then @kbd has no effect.
|
|
|
1342
|
|
|
1343 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
|
|
1344 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
|
|
1345 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
|
|
1346 \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
|
|
|
1347 \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
|
|
|
1348 \def\arg{#1}%
|
|
|
1349 \ifx\arg\worddistinct
|
|
|
1350 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
|
|
1351 \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
|
|
|
1352 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|
|
1353 \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
|
|
|
1354 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|
|
1355 \fi\fi\fi
|
|
|
1356 }
|
|
|
1357 \def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
|
|
1358 \def\wordexample{example}
|
|
|
1359 \def\wordcode{code}
|
|
|
1360
|
|
|
1361 % Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
|
|
|
1362 % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
|
|
|
1363 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
|
|
|
1364
|
|
|
1365 \def\xkey{\key}
|
|
|
1366 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
|
|
1367 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
|
|
1368 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
|
|
|
1369 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
|
|
|
1370
|
|
|
1371 % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
|
|
1372 \let\url=\code
|
|
|
1373 \let\env=\code
|
|
|
1374 \let\command=\code
|
|
|
1375
|
|
|
1376 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
|
|
1377 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
|
|
1378 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
|
|
1379 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
|
|
1380 % a hypertex \special here.
|
|
|
1381 %
|
|
|
1382 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
|
|
1383 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
|
|
1384 \unsepspaces
|
|
|
1385 \pdfurl{#1}%
|
|
|
1386 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|
|
1387 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|
|
1388 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
|
|
1389 \else
|
|
|
1390 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
|
1391 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|
|
1392 \ifpdf
|
|
|
1393 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
|
|
1394 \else
|
|
|
1395 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
|
|
1396 \fi
|
|
|
1397 \else
|
|
|
1398 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
|
|
1399 \fi
|
|
|
1400 \fi
|
|
|
1401 \endlink
|
|
|
1402 \endgroup}
|
|
|
1403
|
|
|
1404 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
|
|
1405 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
|
|
1406 %
|
|
|
1407 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
|
|
1408 \ifpdf
|
|
|
1409 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
|
|
1410 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
|
|
1411 \unsepspaces
|
|
|
1412 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
|
|
1413 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
|
1414 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
|
|
1415 \endlink
|
|
|
1416 \endgroup}
|
|
|
1417 \else
|
|
|
1418 \let\email=\uref
|
|
|
1419 \fi
|
|
|
1420
|
|
|
1421 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
|
|
1422 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
|
|
1423 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
|
|
1424 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
|
|
1425 %
|
|
|
1426 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
|
|
1427
|
|
|
1428 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
|
|
1429 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
|
|
1430 %
|
|
|
1431 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
|
|
1432
|
|
|
1433 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
|
|
|
1434
|
|
|
1435 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
|
|
1436 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
|
|
1437 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
|
|
1438 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
|
|
1439
|
|
|
1440 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
|
|
1441 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
|
|
1442 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
|
|
1443 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
|
|
1444
|
|
|
1445 % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
|
|
|
1446 \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
|
|
|
1447
|
|
|
1448 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
|
|
|
1449 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
|
|
1450
|
|
|
1451
|
|
|
1452 \message{page headings,}
|
|
|
1453
|
|
|
1454 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
|
|
1455 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
|
|
1456
|
|
|
1457 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
|
|
1458 \newif\ifseenauthor
|
|
|
1459 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
|
|
1460
|
|
|
1461 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
|
|
1462 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
|
|
1463 %
|
|
|
1464 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
|
1465 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
|
|
1466 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
|
1467 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
|
|
1468
|
|
|
1469 \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
|
|
|
1470 \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
|
|
1471 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
|
|
1472
|
|
|
1473 \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
|
|
1474 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
|
|
1475 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
|
|
|
1476 %
|
|
|
1477 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
|
|
|
1478 %
|
|
|
1479 % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
|
|
1480 \vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
|
|
1481 %
|
|
|
1482 % Now you can print the title using @title.
|
|
|
1483 \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
|
|
|
1484 \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
|
|
|
1485 % print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
|
|
1486 \finishedtitlepagefalse
|
|
|
1487 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
|
|
|
1488 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
|
|
1489 \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|
|
1490 %
|
|
|
1491 % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
|
|
|
1492 \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
|
|
|
1493 \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
|
|
|
1494 %
|
|
|
1495 % @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
|
|
1496 \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
|
|
|
1497 \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
|
|
|
1498 {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
|
|
|
1499 %
|
|
|
1500 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
|
|
1501 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
|
|
1502 \let\oldpage = \page
|
|
|
1503 \def\page{%
|
|
|
1504 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|
|
1505 \finishtitlepage
|
|
|
1506 \fi
|
|
|
1507 \oldpage
|
|
|
1508 \let\page = \oldpage
|
|
|
1509 \hbox{}}%
|
|
|
1510 % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
|
|
|
1511 }
|
|
|
1512
|
|
|
1513 \def\Etitlepage{%
|
|
|
1514 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|
|
1515 \finishtitlepage
|
|
|
1516 \fi
|
|
|
1517 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
|
|
1518 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
|
|
1519 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
|
|
1520 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
|
|
1521 \oldpage
|
|
|
1522 \endgroup
|
|
|
1523 %
|
|
|
1524 % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
|
|
1525 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
|
1526 \shortcontents
|
|
|
1527 \contents
|
|
|
1528 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
|
|
1529 \global\let\contents = \relax
|
|
|
1530 \fi
|
|
|
1531 %
|
|
|
1532 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
|
1533 \contents
|
|
|
1534 \global\let\contents = \relax
|
|
|
1535 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
|
|
1536 \fi
|
|
|
1537 %
|
|
|
1538 \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
|
|
|
1539 %
|
|
|
1540 \HEADINGSon
|
|
|
1541 }
|
|
|
1542
|
|
|
1543 \def\finishtitlepage{%
|
|
|
1544 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
|
|
1545 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
|
|
1546 \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|
|
1547 }
|
|
|
1548
|
|
|
1549 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
|
|
1550
|
|
|
1551 \let\thispage=\folio
|
|
|
1552
|
|
|
1553 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
|
|
1554 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
|
|
1555 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
|
|
1556 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
|
|
1557
|
|
|
1558 % Now make Tex use those variables
|
|
|
1559 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
|
|
1560 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
|
|
1561 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
|
|
1562 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
|
|
1563 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
|
|
1564
|
|
|
1565 % Commands to set those variables.
|
|
|
1566 % For example, this is what @headings on does
|
|
|
1567 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
|
|
1568 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
|
|
1569 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
|
|
1570 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
|
|
1571
|
|
|
1572 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
|
|
1573 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
|
|
1574 \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
|
|
|
1575
|
|
|
1576 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
|
|
1577 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
|
|
1578 \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
|
|
|
1579
|
|
|
1580 {\catcode`\@=0 %
|
|
|
1581
|
|
|
1582 \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1583 \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1584 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
1585
|
|
|
1586 \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1587 \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1588 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
1589
|
|
|
1590 \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
|
|
1591
|
|
|
1592 \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1593 \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1594 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
1595
|
|
|
1596 \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
|
|
1597 \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
|
|
1598 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
|
|
1599 %
|
|
|
1600 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
|
|
1601 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
|
|
1602 \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
|
|
|
1603 \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
|
|
|
1604 }
|
|
|
1605
|
|
|
1606 \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
|
|
1607 %
|
|
|
1608 }% unbind the catcode of @.
|
|
|
1609
|
|
|
1610 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
|
|
1611 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
|
|
1612 % @headings off turns them off.
|
|
|
1613 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
|
|
1614 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|
|
1615 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|
|
1616 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
|
|
1617 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
|
|
1618 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
|
|
1619
|
|
|
1620 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
1621
|
|
|
1622 \def\HEADINGSoff{
|
|
|
1623 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1624 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
|
|
1625 \HEADINGSoff
|
|
|
1626 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
|
|
1627 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
|
|
1628 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
|
|
1629 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
|
|
1630 % edge of all pages.
|
|
|
1631 \def\HEADINGSdouble{
|
|
|
1632 \global\pageno=1
|
|
|
1633 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1634 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1635 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|
|
1636 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1637 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
|
1638 }
|
|
|
1639 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
1640
|
|
|
1641 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
|
|
1642 % page number on top right.
|
|
|
1643 \def\HEADINGSsingle{
|
|
|
1644 \global\pageno=1
|
|
|
1645 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1646 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1647 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1648 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1649 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
1650 }
|
|
|
1651 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
|
|
1652
|
|
|
1653 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
|
|
1654 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
|
|
1655 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
|
|
1656 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1657 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1658 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|
|
1659 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1660 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
|
1661 }
|
|
|
1662
|
|
|
1663 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
|
|
1664 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
|
|
1665 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1666 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
|
1667 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1668 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
|
1669 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
1670 }
|
|
|
1671
|
|
|
1672 % Subroutines used in generating headings
|
|
|
1673 % Produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
|
|
1674 \def\today{%
|
|
|
1675 \number\day\space
|
|
|
1676 \ifcase\month
|
|
|
1677 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
|
|
1678 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
|
|
1679 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
|
|
1680 \fi
|
|
|
1681 \space\number\year}
|
|
|
1682
|
|
|
1683 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
|
|
1684 % It generates no output of its own.
|
|
|
1685 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
|
|
1686 \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
|
|
|
1687 \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
|
|
|
1688
|
|
|
1689
|
|
|
1690 \message{tables,}
|
|
|
1691 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
|
|
|
1692
|
|
|
1693 % default indentation of table text
|
|
|
1694 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
|
|
1695 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
|
|
1696 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
|
|
1697 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
|
|
1698 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
|
|
1699
|
|
|
1700 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
|
|
1701 \newdimen\itemmax
|
|
|
1702
|
|
|
1703 % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
|
|
1704 % these defs.
|
|
|
1705 % They also define \itemindex
|
|
|
1706 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
|
|
1707
|
|
|
1708 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
|
|
1709
|
|
|
1710 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
|
|
1711
|
|
|
1712 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|
|
1713 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|
|
1714
|
|
|
1715 \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
|
|
1716 \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
|
|
1717
|
|
|
1718 \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
|
|
1719 \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
|
|
1720
|
|
|
1721 \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
|
|
|
1722 \itemzzz {#1}}
|
|
|
1723
|
|
|
1724 \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
|
|
|
1725 \itemzzz {#1}}
|
|
|
1726
|
|
|
1727 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
|
|
1728 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|
|
1729 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
|
|
1730 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
|
|
|
1731 \itemindex{#1}%
|
|
|
1732 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
|
|
1733 %
|
|
|
1734 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
|
|
1735 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
|
|
1736 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
|
|
1737 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
|
|
1738 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
|
|
1739 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
|
|
1740 %
|
|
|
1741 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
|
|
1742 % but leave it ragged-right.
|
|
|
1743 \begingroup
|
|
|
1744 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
|
|
1745 \advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
|
|
1746 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
|
|
1747 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
|
|
1748 \endgroup
|
|
|
1749 %
|
|
|
1750 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
|
|
1751 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
|
|
1752 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
|
|
1753 %
|
|
|
1754 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
|
|
|
1755 % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
|
|
|
1756 % \baselineskip glue.
|
|
|
1757 \nobreak
|
|
|
1758 \endgroup
|
|
|
1759 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
|
|
1760 \else
|
|
|
1761 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
|
|
1762 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
|
|
1763 \noindent
|
|
|
1764 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
|
|
1765 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
|
|
1766 % eventually be printed.
|
|
|
1767 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
|
|
1768 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
|
|
1769 \unhbox0
|
|
|
1770 \nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
|
|
1771 \endgroup
|
|
|
1772 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
|
|
1773 \fi
|
|
|
1774 }
|
|
|
1775
|
|
|
1776 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1777 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1778 \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1779 \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1780 \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1781 \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
|
|
|
1782
|
|
|
1783 % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
|
|
|
1784 \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
|
|
|
1785
|
|
|
1786 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
|
|
1787 \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
|
|
|
1788 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
|
|
1789 \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
|
|
|
1790 \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
|
|
|
1791
|
|
|
1792 \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
|
|
|
1793 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
|
|
1794 \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
|
|
|
1795 \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
|
|
|
1796 \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1797 \let\Etable=\relax}}
|
|
|
1798
|
|
|
1799 \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
|
|
|
1800 {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
|
|
1801 \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
|
|
|
1802 \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
|
|
|
1803 \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1804 \let\Etable=\relax}}
|
|
|
1805
|
|
|
1806 \def\dontindex #1{}
|
|
|
1807 \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
|
|
|
1808 \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
|
|
|
1809
|
|
|
1810 {\obeyspaces %
|
|
|
1811 \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
|
|
|
1812 \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
|
|
|
1813
|
|
|
1814 \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
|
|
1815 \aboveenvbreak %
|
|
|
1816 \begingroup %
|
|
|
1817 \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
|
|
|
1818 \let\itemindex=#1%
|
|
|
1819 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
|
|
|
1820 \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
|
|
|
1821 \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
|
|
|
1822 \def\itemfont{#2}%
|
|
|
1823 \itemmax=\tableindent %
|
|
|
1824 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
|
|
1825 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
|
|
|
1826 \exdentamount=\tableindent
|
|
|
1827 \parindent = 0pt
|
|
|
1828 \parskip = \smallskipamount
|
|
|
1829 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
|
|
1830 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1831 \let\item = \internalBitem %
|
|
|
1832 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
|
|
|
1833 \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
|
|
|
1834 \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
|
|
|
1835 \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
|
|
|
1836 \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
|
|
|
1837 }
|
|
|
1838
|
|
|
1839 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
|
|
1840
|
|
|
1841 \newcount \itemno
|
|
|
1842
|
|
|
1843 \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
|
|
|
1844
|
|
|
1845 \def\itemizezzz #1{%
|
|
|
1846 \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
|
|
|
1847 \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
|
|
|
1848 }
|
|
|
1849
|
|
|
1850 \def\itemizey #1#2{%
|
|
|
1851 \aboveenvbreak %
|
|
|
1852 \itemmax=\itemindent %
|
|
|
1853 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
|
|
1854 \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
|
|
|
1855 \exdentamount=\itemindent
|
|
|
1856 \parindent = 0pt %
|
|
|
1857 \parskip = \smallskipamount %
|
|
|
1858 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
|
|
1859 \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
|
|
1860 \def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
|
|
1861 \let\item=\itemizeitem}
|
|
|
1862
|
|
|
1863 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
|
|
1864 % These are `.?!:;,'
|
|
|
1865 \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
|
|
|
1866 \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
|
|
|
1867
|
|
|
1868 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
|
|
1869 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
|
|
1870 %
|
|
|
1871 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
|
|
1872
|
|
|
1873 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
|
|
1874 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
|
|
1875 % argument is the same as `1'.
|
|
|
1876 %
|
|
|
1877 \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
|
|
|
1878 \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
|
|
1879 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
|
|
1880 \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
|
|
|
1881 %
|
|
|
1882 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
|
|
1883 \def\thearg{#1}%
|
|
|
1884 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
|
|
1885 %
|
|
|
1886 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
|
|
1887 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
|
|
1888 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
|
|
1889 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
|
|
1890 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
|
|
1891 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
|
|
1892 \ifx\rest\empty
|
|
|
1893 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
|
|
1894 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
|
|
1895 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
|
|
1896 % not equal to itself.
|
|
|
1897 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
|
|
1898 %
|
|
|
1899 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
|
|
1900 % continuing to look for a <number>.
|
|
|
1901 %
|
|
|
1902 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
|
|
1903 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
|
|
1904 \else
|
|
|
1905 % It's a letter.
|
|
|
1906 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
|
|
1907 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
|
|
1908 \else
|
|
|
1909 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
|
|
1910 \fi
|
|
|
1911 \fi
|
|
|
1912 \else
|
|
|
1913 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
|
|
1914 \numericenumerate
|
|
|
1915 \fi
|
|
|
1916 }
|
|
|
1917
|
|
|
1918 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
|
|
1919 % given in \thearg.
|
|
|
1920 %
|
|
|
1921 \def\numericenumerate{%
|
|
|
1922 \itemno = \thearg
|
|
|
1923 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
|
|
1924 }
|
|
|
1925
|
|
|
1926 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|
|
1927 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
|
|
1928 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|
|
1929 \startenumeration{%
|
|
|
1930 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|
|
1931 \ifnum\itemno=0
|
|
|
1932 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|
|
1933 alphabet}%
|
|
|
1934 \fi
|
|
|
1935 \char\lccode\itemno
|
|
|
1936 }%
|
|
|
1937 }
|
|
|
1938
|
|
|
1939 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|
|
1940 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
|
|
1941 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|
|
1942 \startenumeration{%
|
|
|
1943 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|
|
1944 \ifnum\itemno=0
|
|
|
1945 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|
|
1946 alphabet}
|
|
|
1947 \fi
|
|
|
1948 \char\uccode\itemno
|
|
|
1949 }%
|
|
|
1950 }
|
|
|
1951
|
|
|
1952 % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
|
|
1953 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
|
|
1954 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
|
|
1955 %
|
|
|
1956 \def\startenumeration#1{%
|
|
|
1957 \advance\itemno by -1
|
|
|
1958 \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
|
|
|
1959 }
|
|
|
1960
|
|
|
1961 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
|
|
1962 % to @enumerate.
|
|
|
1963 %
|
|
|
1964 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
|
|
1965 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
|
|
1966 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|
|
1967 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|
|
1968
|
|
|
1969 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
|
|
|
1970
|
|
|
1971 \def\itemizeitem{%
|
|
|
1972 \advance\itemno by 1
|
|
|
1973 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
|
|
|
1974 \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
|
|
|
1975 {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
|
|
|
1976 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
|
|
|
1977 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
|
|
|
1978 \flushcr}
|
|
|
1979
|
|
|
1980 % @multitable macros
|
|
|
1981 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
|
|
1982 %
|
|
|
1983 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
|
|
1984 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
|
|
1985 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
|
|
1986 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
|
|
1987
|
|
|
1988 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
|
|
1989
|
|
|
1990 % To make preamble:
|
|
|
1991 %
|
|
|
1992 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
|
|
1993 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
|
|
1994 % @item ...
|
|
|
1995 %
|
|
|
1996 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
|
|
1997 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
|
|
1998 % columns as desired.
|
|
|
1999
|
|
|
2000
|
|
|
2001 % Or use a template:
|
|
|
2002 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|
|
2003 % @item ...
|
|
|
2004 % using the widest term desired in each column.
|
|
|
2005 %
|
|
|
2006 % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
|
|
|
2007 % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
|
|
|
2008 % will parse correctly, i.e.,
|
|
|
2009 %
|
|
|
2010 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
|
|
|
2011 % template}
|
|
|
2012 % Not:
|
|
|
2013 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
|
|
|
2014 % {Column 3 template}
|
|
|
2015
|
|
|
2016 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
|
|
2017 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
|
|
2018 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
|
|
2019 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
|
|
2020
|
|
|
2021 % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
|
|
|
2022 % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
|
|
|
2023
|
|
|
2024 % Sample multitable:
|
|
|
2025
|
|
|
2026 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|
|
2027 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
|
|
2028 % @item
|
|
|
2029 % first col stuff
|
|
|
2030 % @tab
|
|
|
2031 % second col stuff
|
|
|
2032 % @tab
|
|
|
2033 % third col
|
|
|
2034 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
|
|
2035 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
|
|
2036 %
|
|
|
2037 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
|
|
2038 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
|
|
2039 % @end multitable
|
|
|
2040
|
|
|
2041 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
|
|
2042 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
|
|
2043 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
|
|
2044 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
|
|
2045 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
|
|
2046 % to baseline.
|
|
|
2047 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
|
|
2048 %
|
|
|
2049 \newskip\multitableparskip
|
|
|
2050 \newskip\multitableparindent
|
|
|
2051 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2052 \newskip\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2053 \multitableparskip=0pt
|
|
|
2054 \multitableparindent=6pt
|
|
|
2055 \multitablecolspace=12pt
|
|
|
2056 \multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|
|
2057
|
|
|
2058 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
|
|
2059 %
|
|
|
2060 \let\endsetuptable\relax
|
|
|
2061 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
|
|
2062 \let\columnfractions\relax
|
|
|
2063 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
|
|
2064 \newif\ifsetpercent
|
|
|
2065
|
|
|
2066 % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
|
|
|
2067 % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
|
|
|
2068 % just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
|
|
|
2069 % percent of \hsize for this column.
|
|
|
2070 \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
|
|
|
2071 \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|
|
2072 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
|
|
|
2073 \setuptable
|
|
|
2074 }
|
|
|
2075
|
|
|
2076 \newcount\colcount
|
|
|
2077 \def\setuptable#1{%
|
|
|
2078 \def\firstarg{#1}%
|
|
|
2079 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
|
|
2080 \let\go = \relax
|
|
|
2081 \else
|
|
|
2082 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
|
|
2083 \global\setpercenttrue
|
|
|
2084 \else
|
|
|
2085 \ifsetpercent
|
|
|
2086 \let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|
|
2087 \else
|
|
|
2088 \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|
|
2089 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
|
|
|
2090 % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
|
|
2091 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
|
|
2092 \fi
|
|
|
2093 \fi
|
|
|
2094 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|
|
2095 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
|
|
2096 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
|
|
2097 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
|
|
2098 \else
|
|
|
2099 \let\go = \setuptable
|
|
|
2100 \fi%
|
|
|
2101 \fi
|
|
|
2102 \go
|
|
|
2103 }
|
|
|
2104
|
|
|
2105 % This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is
|
|
|
2106 % not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we
|
|
|
2107 % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
|
|
|
2108 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
|
|
2109 \def\tab{&}
|
|
|
2110
|
|
|
2111 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
|
|
2112 %
|
|
|
2113 \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
|
|
|
2114 \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
|
|
|
2115 \vskip\parskip
|
|
|
2116 \let\item\crcr
|
|
|
2117 \tolerance=9500
|
|
|
2118 \hbadness=9500
|
|
|
2119 \setmultitablespacing
|
|
|
2120 \parskip=\multitableparskip
|
|
|
2121 \parindent=\multitableparindent
|
|
|
2122 \overfullrule=0pt
|
|
|
2123 \global\colcount=0
|
|
|
2124 \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
|
|
|
2125 %
|
|
|
2126 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
|
|
2127 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
|
|
2128 %
|
|
|
2129 % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
|
|
|
2130 % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
|
|
|
2131 % The table preamble
|
|
|
2132 % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
|
|
|
2133 \everycr{\noalign{%
|
|
|
2134 %
|
|
|
2135 % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
|
|
2136 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
|
|
|
2137 % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
|
|
|
2138 % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
|
|
2139 \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
|
|
|
2140 %
|
|
|
2141 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
|
|
2142 % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
|
|
2143 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
|
|
2144 % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
|
|
2145 \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
|
|
|
2146 \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
|
|
2147 %
|
|
|
2148 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
|
|
2149 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
|
|
2150 % the first one.
|
|
|
2151 %
|
|
|
2152 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2153 % to the width of each template entry.
|
|
|
2154 %
|
|
|
2155 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
|
|
2156 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
|
|
2157 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
|
|
2158 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
|
|
2159 %
|
|
|
2160 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
|
|
2161 \rightskip=0pt
|
|
|
2162 \ifnum\colcount=1
|
|
|
2163 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
|
|
2164 \advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
|
|
2165 \else
|
|
|
2166 \ifsetpercent \else
|
|
|
2167 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
|
|
2168 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
|
|
2169 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2170 \fi
|
|
|
2171 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
|
|
2172 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
|
|
2173 \fi
|
|
|
2174 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
|
|
2175 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
|
|
2176 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
|
|
2177 % For example:
|
|
|
2178 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
|
|
2179 % @item @code{#}
|
|
|
2180 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
|
|
2181 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
|
|
|
2182 % characters.
|
|
|
2183 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
|
|
|
2184 }
|
|
|
2185
|
|
|
2186 \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
|
|
|
2187 % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
|
|
|
2188 % current baselineskip.
|
|
|
2189 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|
|
2190 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
|
|
2191 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
|
|
2192 %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
|
|
|
2193 %% to keep lines equally spaced
|
|
|
2194 \let\multistrut = \strut
|
|
|
2195 \else
|
|
|
2196 %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
|
|
|
2197 \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
|
|
|
2198 width0pt\relax} \fi
|
|
|
2199 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
|
|
2200 %% table. If not, do nothing.
|
|
|
2201 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
|
|
2202 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2203 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2204 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|
|
2205 %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|
|
2206 \fi%
|
|
|
2207 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|
|
2208 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|
|
2209 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|
|
2210 %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|
|
2211 \fi}
|
|
|
2212
|
|
|
2213
|
|
|
2214 \message{conditionals,}
|
|
|
2215 % Prevent errors for section commands.
|
|
|
2216 % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
|
|
|
2217 \def\ignoresections{%
|
|
|
2218 \let\chapter=\relax
|
|
|
2219 \let\unnumbered=\relax
|
|
|
2220 \let\top=\relax
|
|
|
2221 \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
|
|
|
2222 \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
|
|
|
2223 \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
2224 \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
2225 \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
2226 \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
2227 \let\section=\relax
|
|
|
2228 \let\subsec=\relax
|
|
|
2229 \let\subsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
2230 \let\subsection=\relax
|
|
|
2231 \let\subsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
2232 \let\appendix=\relax
|
|
|
2233 \let\appendixsec=\relax
|
|
|
2234 \let\appendixsection=\relax
|
|
|
2235 \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
2236 \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
2237 \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
|
|
|
2238 \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
|
|
|
2239 \let\contents=\relax
|
|
|
2240 \let\smallbook=\relax
|
|
|
2241 \let\titlepage=\relax
|
|
|
2242 }
|
|
|
2243
|
|
|
2244 % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
|
|
|
2245 % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
|
|
|
2246 % incorrectly.
|
|
|
2247 %
|
|
|
2248 \def\ignoremorecommands{%
|
|
|
2249 \let\defcodeindex = \relax
|
|
|
2250 \let\defcv = \relax
|
|
|
2251 \let\deffn = \relax
|
|
|
2252 \let\deffnx = \relax
|
|
|
2253 \let\defindex = \relax
|
|
|
2254 \let\defivar = \relax
|
|
|
2255 \let\defmac = \relax
|
|
|
2256 \let\defmethod = \relax
|
|
|
2257 \let\defop = \relax
|
|
|
2258 \let\defopt = \relax
|
|
|
2259 \let\defspec = \relax
|
|
|
2260 \let\deftp = \relax
|
|
|
2261 \let\deftypefn = \relax
|
|
|
2262 \let\deftypefun = \relax
|
|
|
2263 \let\deftypeivar = \relax
|
|
|
2264 \let\deftypeop = \relax
|
|
|
2265 \let\deftypevar = \relax
|
|
|
2266 \let\deftypevr = \relax
|
|
|
2267 \let\defun = \relax
|
|
|
2268 \let\defvar = \relax
|
|
|
2269 \let\defvr = \relax
|
|
|
2270 \let\ref = \relax
|
|
|
2271 \let\xref = \relax
|
|
|
2272 \let\printindex = \relax
|
|
|
2273 \let\pxref = \relax
|
|
|
2274 \let\settitle = \relax
|
|
|
2275 \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
|
|
|
2276 \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
|
|
|
2277 \let\everyheading = \relax
|
|
|
2278 \let\evenheading = \relax
|
|
|
2279 \let\oddheading = \relax
|
|
|
2280 \let\everyfooting = \relax
|
|
|
2281 \let\evenfooting = \relax
|
|
|
2282 \let\oddfooting = \relax
|
|
|
2283 \let\headings = \relax
|
|
|
2284 \let\include = \relax
|
|
|
2285 \let\lowersections = \relax
|
|
|
2286 \let\down = \relax
|
|
|
2287 \let\raisesections = \relax
|
|
|
2288 \let\up = \relax
|
|
|
2289 \let\set = \relax
|
|
|
2290 \let\clear = \relax
|
|
|
2291 \let\item = \relax
|
|
|
2292 }
|
|
|
2293
|
|
|
2294 % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
|
|
|
2295 %
|
|
|
2296 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
|
|
2297
|
|
|
2298 % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
|
|
|
2299 %
|
|
|
2300 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
|
|
2301 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
|
|
2302 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
|
|
2303 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
|
|
2304 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
|
|
2305 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
|
|
2306
|
|
|
2307 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
|
|
2308 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
|
|
2309 \let\dircategory = \comment
|
|
|
2310
|
|
|
2311 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
|
|
|
2312 %
|
|
|
2313 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
|
|
2314 % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
|
|
2315 \ignoresections
|
|
|
2316 %
|
|
|
2317 % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
|
|
|
2318 % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
|
|
|
2319 % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
|
|
|
2320 \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
|
|
|
2321 %
|
|
|
2322 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
|
|
2323 \catcode32 = 10
|
|
|
2324 %
|
|
|
2325 % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
|
|
|
2326 \catcode`\{ = 9
|
|
|
2327 \catcode`\} = 9
|
|
|
2328 %
|
|
|
2329 % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
|
|
|
2330 \catcode`\@ = 12
|
|
|
2331 %
|
|
|
2332 % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
|
|
|
2333 % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
|
|
|
2334 % @c @end ifinfo
|
|
|
2335 % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
|
|
|
2336 % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
|
|
|
2337 \catcode`\c = 14
|
|
|
2338 %
|
|
|
2339 % And now expand that command.
|
|
|
2340 \doignoretext
|
|
|
2341 }
|
|
|
2342
|
|
|
2343 % What we do to finish off ignored text.
|
|
|
2344 %
|
|
|
2345 \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|
|
2346
|
|
|
2347 \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
|
|
|
2348 \def\obstexwarn{%
|
|
|
2349 \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
|
|
|
2350 % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
|
|
|
2351 % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
|
|
|
2352 \immediate\write16{}
|
|
|
2353 \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
|
|
|
2354 \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
|
|
|
2355 \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
|
|
|
2356 \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
|
|
|
2357 \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
|
|
|
2358 \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
|
|
|
2359 \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
|
|
|
2360 \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
|
|
|
2361 \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
|
|
|
2362 \immediate\write16{}
|
|
|
2363 \global\warnedobstrue
|
|
|
2364 \fi
|
|
|
2365 }
|
|
|
2366
|
|
|
2367 % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
|
|
|
2368 % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
|
|
|
2369 % uncomment the following line:
|
|
|
2370 %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
|
|
|
2371
|
|
|
2372 % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
|
|
|
2373 % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
|
|
|
2374 %
|
|
|
2375 \def\nestedignore#1{%
|
|
|
2376 \obstexwarn
|
|
|
2377 % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
|
|
|
2378 % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
|
|
|
2379 % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
|
|
|
2380 % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
|
|
|
2381 % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
|
|
|
2382 %
|
|
|
2383 \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
2384 % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
|
|
2385 \ignoresections
|
|
|
2386 %
|
|
|
2387 % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
|
|
|
2388 % @end command again.
|
|
|
2389 \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|
|
2390 %
|
|
|
2391 % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
|
|
|
2392 % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
|
|
|
2393 % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
|
|
|
2394 % undefine them.
|
|
|
2395 %
|
|
|
2396 % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
|
|
|
2397 % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
|
|
|
2398 \ignoremorecommands
|
|
|
2399 %
|
|
|
2400 % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
|
|
|
2401 % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
|
|
|
2402 % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
|
|
|
2403 % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
|
|
|
2404 % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
|
|
|
2405 % stuff compared to the main input.
|
|
|
2406 %
|
|
|
2407 \nullfont
|
|
|
2408 \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
|
|
|
2409 \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
|
|
|
2410 \let\tensf=\nullfont
|
|
|
2411 % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample).
|
|
|
2412 \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
|
|
|
2413 \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
|
|
|
2414 \let\smallsf=\nullfont
|
|
|
2415 %
|
|
|
2416 % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
|
|
|
2417 \tracinglostchars = 0
|
|
|
2418 %
|
|
|
2419 % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
|
|
|
2420 \frenchspacing
|
|
|
2421 %
|
|
|
2422 % Don't report underfull hboxes.
|
|
|
2423 \hbadness = 10000
|
|
|
2424 %
|
|
|
2425 % Do minimal line-breaking.
|
|
|
2426 \pretolerance = 10000
|
|
|
2427 %
|
|
|
2428 % Do not execute instructions in @tex
|
|
|
2429 \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
|
|
|
2430 % Do not execute macro definitions.
|
|
|
2431 % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
|
|
|
2432 \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
|
|
|
2433 }
|
|
|
2434
|
|
|
2435 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
|
|
2436 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
|
|
2437 %
|
|
|
2438 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
|
|
2439 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
|
|
2440 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
|
|
2441 % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
|
|
|
2442 % losing inside @example, for instance.
|
|
|
2443 %
|
|
|
2444 \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
|
|
|
2445 \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
|
|
|
2446 \parsearg\setxxx}
|
|
|
2447 \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
|
|
2448 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
|
|
2449 \def\temp{#2}%
|
|
|
2450 \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
|
|
|
2451 \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
|
|
2452 \fi
|
|
|
2453 \endgroup
|
|
|
2454 }
|
|
|
2455 % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
|
|
|
2456 % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
|
|
|
2457 % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
|
|
|
2458 \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
|
|
|
2459
|
|
|
2460 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
|
|
2461 %
|
|
|
2462 \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
|
|
|
2463 \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
|
|
|
2464
|
|
|
2465 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
|
|
2466 {
|
|
|
2467 \catcode`\_ = \active
|
|
|
2468 %
|
|
|
2469 % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
|
|
|
2470 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
|
|
|
2471 % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
|
|
|
2472 \gdef\value{\begingroup
|
|
|
2473 \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
|
|
|
2474 \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
|
|
|
2475 \valuexxx}
|
|
|
2476 }
|
|
|
2477 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
|
|
2478
|
|
|
2479 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
|
|
2480 % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
|
|
|
2481 % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
|
|
|
2482 % about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
|
|
|
2483 % winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
|
|
|
2484 % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
|
|
|
2485 % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
|
|
|
2486 % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
|
|
2487 %
|
|
|
2488 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
|
|
2489 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
2490 {[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
|
|
2491 \else
|
|
|
2492 \csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|
|
2493 \fi
|
|
|
2494 }
|
|
|
2495
|
|
|
2496 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
|
|
2497 % with @set.
|
|
|
2498 %
|
|
|
2499 \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
|
|
|
2500 \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
|
|
|
2501 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
2502 \expandafter\ifsetfail
|
|
|
2503 \else
|
|
|
2504 \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
|
|
|
2505 \fi
|
|
|
2506 }
|
|
|
2507 \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
|
|
|
2508 \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
|
|
|
2509 \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
|
|
|
2510
|
|
|
2511 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
|
|
2512 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
|
|
2513 %
|
|
|
2514 \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
|
|
|
2515 \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
|
|
|
2516 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
2517 \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
|
|
|
2518 \else
|
|
|
2519 \expandafter\ifclearfail
|
|
|
2520 \fi
|
|
|
2521 }
|
|
|
2522 \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
|
|
|
2523 \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
|
|
|
2524 \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
|
|
|
2525
|
|
|
2526 % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
|
|
|
2527 % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex'
|
|
|
2528 % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
|
|
|
2529 %
|
|
|
2530 \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
|
|
|
2531 \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
|
|
|
2532 \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
|
|
|
2533 \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
|
|
|
2534 \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
|
|
|
2535 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
|
|
|
2536
|
|
|
2537 % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
|
|
|
2538 % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
|
|
|
2539 % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
|
|
|
2540 % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
|
|
|
2541 % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
|
|
|
2542 % the @ifset might be nested.)
|
|
|
2543 %
|
|
|
2544 \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
|
|
|
2545 \edef\temp{%
|
|
|
2546 % Remember the current value of \E#1.
|
|
|
2547 \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
|
|
|
2548 %
|
|
|
2549 % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
|
|
|
2550 \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
|
|
|
2551 }%
|
|
|
2552 \temp
|
|
|
2553 }
|
|
|
2554
|
|
|
2555 % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
|
|
|
2556 % control sequences after we've constructed them.
|
|
|
2557 %
|
|
|
2558 \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
2559
|
|
|
2560 % @defininfoenclose.
|
|
|
2561 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
|
|
2562
|
|
|
2563
|
|
|
2564 \message{indexing,}
|
|
|
2565 % Index generation facilities
|
|
|
2566
|
|
|
2567 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
|
|
2568 % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
|
|
|
2569 {\catcode`\@=11
|
|
|
2570 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
|
|
|
2571
|
|
|
2572 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
|
|
2573 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
|
|
2574 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
|
|
2575 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
|
|
2576 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
|
|
2577 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
|
|
2578 % for the sake of vms.
|
|
|
2579 %
|
|
|
2580 \def\newindex#1{%
|
|
|
2581 \iflinks
|
|
|
2582 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2583 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
|
|
2584 \fi
|
|
|
2585 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
|
|
2586 \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
|
|
2587 }
|
|
|
2588
|
|
|
2589 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
|
|
2590
|
|
|
2591 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
|
|
2592
|
|
|
2593 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
|
|
2594
|
|
|
2595 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
|
|
2596 \iflinks
|
|
|
2597 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2598 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
|
|
2599 \fi
|
|
|
2600 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
|
|
2601 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
|
|
|
2602 }
|
|
|
2603
|
|
|
2604 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
|
|
2605
|
|
|
2606 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
|
|
2607 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
|
|
2608 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
|
|
2609 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
|
|
2610 \def\synindex#1 #2 {%
|
|
|
2611 \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2612 \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2613 \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
|
|
|
2614 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
|
|
|
2615 \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
|
|
|
2616 }
|
|
|
2617
|
|
|
2618 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
|
|
2619 % inside @code.
|
|
|
2620 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
|
|
|
2621 \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2622 \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|
|
2623 \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
|
|
|
2624 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
|
|
|
2625 \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
|
|
|
2626 }
|
|
|
2627
|
|
|
2628 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
|
|
2629 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
|
|
2630 % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
|
|
2631
|
|
|
2632 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
|
|
2633 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
|
|
2634
|
|
|
2635 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|
|
2636 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
|
|
2637
|
|
|
2638 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
|
|
2639 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
|
|
2640
|
|
|
2641 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
|
|
2642 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
|
|
2643 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
|
|
2644
|
|
|
2645 \def\indexdummies{%
|
|
|
2646 \def\ { }%
|
|
|
2647 % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
|
|
|
2648 \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
|
|
|
2649 \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
|
|
|
2650 \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
|
|
|
2651 \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
|
|
|
2652 \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
|
|
|
2653 \def\={\realbackslash =}%
|
|
|
2654 \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
|
|
|
2655 \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
|
|
|
2656 \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
|
|
|
2657 \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
|
|
|
2658 \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
|
|
|
2659 \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
|
|
|
2660 % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
|
|
2661 \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
|
|
|
2662 \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
|
|
|
2663 \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
|
|
|
2664 \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
|
|
|
2665 \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
|
|
|
2666 \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
|
|
|
2667 \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
|
|
|
2668 \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
|
|
|
2669 \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
|
|
|
2670 \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
|
|
|
2671 \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
|
|
|
2672 % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
|
|
|
2673 % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
|
|
|
2674 % laboriously list every single command here.)
|
|
|
2675 \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
|
|
|
2676 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
|
|
2677 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
|
|
2678 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
|
|
|
2679 \let\{ = \mylbrace
|
|
|
2680 \let\} = \myrbrace
|
|
|
2681 \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
|
|
|
2682 \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
|
|
|
2683 \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
|
|
|
2684 %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
|
|
|
2685 \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
|
|
|
2686 \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
|
|
|
2687 \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
|
|
|
2688 \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
|
|
|
2689 \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
|
|
|
2690 \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
|
|
|
2691 \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
|
|
|
2692 \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
|
|
|
2693 \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
|
|
|
2694 \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
|
|
|
2695 \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
|
|
|
2696 \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
|
|
|
2697 \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
|
|
|
2698 \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
|
|
|
2699 \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
|
|
|
2700 \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
|
|
|
2701 \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
|
|
|
2702 \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
|
|
|
2703 \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
|
|
|
2704 \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
|
|
|
2705 \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
|
|
|
2706 \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
|
|
|
2707 \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
|
|
|
2708 \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
|
|
|
2709 \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
|
|
|
2710 \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
|
|
|
2711 \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
|
|
|
2712 \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
|
|
|
2713 \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
|
|
|
2714 \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
|
|
|
2715 \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
|
|
|
2716 \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
|
|
|
2717 \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
|
|
|
2718 \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
|
|
|
2719 \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
|
|
|
2720 \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
|
|
|
2721 \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
|
|
|
2722 \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
|
|
|
2723 %
|
|
|
2724 % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
|
|
|
2725 % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
|
|
|
2726 % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
|
|
2727 \let\value = \expandablevalue
|
|
|
2728 %
|
|
|
2729 \unsepspaces
|
|
|
2730 % Turn off macro expansion
|
|
|
2731 \turnoffmacros
|
|
|
2732 }
|
|
|
2733
|
|
|
2734 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
|
|
2735 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
|
|
2736 % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
|
|
2737 {\obeyspaces
|
|
|
2738 \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
|
|
|
2739
|
|
|
2740 % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
|
|
|
2741 % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
|
|
|
2742 \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
|
|
|
2743 \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
|
|
|
2744 \def\indexdummydots{...}
|
|
|
2745
|
|
|
2746 \def\indexnofonts{%
|
|
|
2747 % Just ignore accents.
|
|
|
2748 \let\,=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2749 \let\"=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2750 \let\`=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2751 \let\'=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2752 \let\^=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2753 \let\~=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2754 \let\==\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2755 \let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2756 \let\c=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2757 \let\d=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2758 \let\u=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2759 \let\v=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2760 \let\H=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2761 \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2762 % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
|
|
2763 \def\oe{oe}%
|
|
|
2764 \def\ae{ae}%
|
|
|
2765 \def\aa{aa}%
|
|
|
2766 \def\OE{OE}%
|
|
|
2767 \def\AE{AE}%
|
|
|
2768 \def\AA{AA}%
|
|
|
2769 \def\o{o}%
|
|
|
2770 \def\O{O}%
|
|
|
2771 \def\l{l}%
|
|
|
2772 \def\L{L}%
|
|
|
2773 \def\ss{ss}%
|
|
|
2774 \let\w=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2775 \let\t=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2776 \let\r=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2777 \let\i=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2778 \let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2779 \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2780 \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2781 \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2782 \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2783 %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
|
|
2784 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
|
|
|
2785 %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2786 \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2787 \let\code=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2788 \let\url=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2789 \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2790 \let\env=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2791 \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2792 \let\command=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2793 \let\option=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2794 \let\file=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2795 \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2796 \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2797 \let\key=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2798 \let\var=\indexdummyfont
|
|
|
2799 \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
|
|
|
2800 \let\dots=\indexdummydots
|
|
|
2801 \def\@{@}%
|
|
|
2802 }
|
|
|
2803
|
|
|
2804 % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
|
|
|
2805 % We must first make another character (@) an escape
|
|
|
2806 % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
|
|
|
2807
|
|
|
2808 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
|
|
|
2809 @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
|
|
|
2810
|
|
|
2811 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
|
|
2812 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
|
|
2813
|
|
|
2814 % For \ifx comparisons.
|
|
|
2815 \def\emptymacro{\empty}
|
|
|
2816
|
|
|
2817 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
|
|
2818 %
|
|
|
2819 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
|
|
|
2820
|
|
|
2821 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
|
|
2822 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
|
|
2823 % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
|
|
|
2824 % is with defuns, which call us directly.
|
|
|
2825 %
|
|
|
2826 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
2827 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
|
|
2828 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
|
|
2829 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
|
|
|
2830 \fi
|
|
|
2831 {%
|
|
|
2832 \count255=\lastpenalty
|
|
|
2833 {%
|
|
|
2834 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
|
|
2835 \escapechar=`\\
|
|
|
2836 {%
|
|
|
2837 \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
|
|
|
2838 \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
|
|
2839 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
|
|
2840 %
|
|
|
2841 \def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
|
|
2842 %
|
|
|
2843 % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
|
|
|
2844 \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
|
|
|
2845 \let\subentry = \empty
|
|
|
2846 \else
|
|
|
2847 \def\subentry{ #3}%
|
|
|
2848 \fi
|
|
|
2849 %
|
|
|
2850 % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
|
|
|
2851 % off to get the string to sort by.
|
|
|
2852 {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
|
|
|
2853 %
|
|
|
2854 % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
|
|
|
2855 \toks0 = {#2}%
|
|
|
2856 %
|
|
|
2857 % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
|
|
|
2858 % string. And include a space.
|
|
|
2859 \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
|
|
|
2860 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
|
|
|
2861 \fi
|
|
|
2862 %
|
|
|
2863 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
|
|
|
2864 % and the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
|
|
2865 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
|
|
|
2866 % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
|
|
|
2867 \edef\temp{%
|
|
|
2868 \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
|
|
|
2869 \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
|
|
2870 }%
|
|
|
2871 %
|
|
|
2872 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
|
|
2873 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
|
|
2874 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
|
|
2875 % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
|
|
|
2876 % like this:
|
|
|
2877 % @end defun
|
|
|
2878 % @tindex whatever
|
|
|
2879 % @defun ...
|
|
|
2880 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
|
|
2881 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
|
|
2882 % the previous defun.
|
|
|
2883 %
|
|
|
2884 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
|
|
2885 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
|
|
2886 %
|
|
|
2887 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
|
|
2888 %
|
|
|
2889 \iflinks
|
|
|
2890 \ifvmode
|
|
|
2891 \skip0 = \lastskip
|
|
|
2892 \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
|
|
|
2893 \fi
|
|
|
2894 %
|
|
|
2895 \temp % do the write
|
|
|
2896 %
|
|
|
2897 %
|
|
|
2898 \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
|
|
|
2899 \fi
|
|
|
2900 }%
|
|
|
2901 }%
|
|
|
2902 \penalty\count255
|
|
|
2903 }%
|
|
|
2904 }
|
|
|
2905
|
|
|
2906 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
|
|
2907 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
|
|
2908 % or
|
|
|
2909 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|
|
2910 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
|
|
2911 % containing these kinds of lines:
|
|
|
2912 % \initial {c}
|
|
|
2913 % before the first topic whose initial is c
|
|
|
2914 % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
|
|
2915 % for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
|
|
2916 % \primary {topic}
|
|
|
2917 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
|
|
2918 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
|
|
2919 % for each subtopic.
|
|
|
2920
|
|
|
2921 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
|
|
2922 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
|
|
2923
|
|
|
2924 \def\findex {\fnindex}
|
|
|
2925 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
|
|
2926 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
|
|
2927 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
|
|
2928 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
|
|
2929 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
|
|
2930
|
|
|
2931 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
|
|
2932 {\obeylines %
|
|
|
2933 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
|
|
2934 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
|
|
2935
|
|
|
2936 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
|
|
2937
|
|
|
2938 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
|
|
2939 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
|
|
2940 %
|
|
|
2941 \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
|
|
|
2942 \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
|
|
|
2943 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
|
|
2944 %
|
|
|
2945 \smallfonts \rm
|
|
|
2946 \tolerance = 9500
|
|
|
2947 \indexbreaks
|
|
|
2948 %
|
|
|
2949 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
|
|
2950 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
|
|
2951 % \initial {@}
|
|
|
2952 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
|
|
2953 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
|
|
2954 \catcode`\@ = 11
|
|
|
2955 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
|
|
2956 \ifeof 1
|
|
|
2957 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
|
|
2958 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
|
|
2959 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
|
|
2960 % there is some text.
|
|
|
2961 \putwordIndexNonexistent
|
|
|
2962 \else
|
|
|
2963 %
|
|
|
2964 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
|
|
2965 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
|
|
2966 % it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
|
|
2967 \read 1 to \temp
|
|
|
2968 \ifeof 1
|
|
|
2969 \putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
|
|
2970 \else
|
|
|
2971 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
|
|
2972 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
|
|
2973 % to make right now.
|
|
|
2974 \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
|
|
|
2975 \catcode`\\ = 0
|
|
|
2976 \escapechar = `\\
|
|
|
2977 \begindoublecolumns
|
|
|
2978 \input \jobname.#1s
|
|
|
2979 \enddoublecolumns
|
|
|
2980 \fi
|
|
|
2981 \fi
|
|
|
2982 \closein 1
|
|
|
2983 \endgroup}
|
|
|
2984
|
|
|
2985 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
|
|
2986 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
|
|
2987
|
|
|
2988 \def\initial#1{{%
|
|
|
2989 % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
|
|
2990 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
|
|
2991 %
|
|
|
2992 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
|
|
2993 \removelastskip
|
|
|
2994 %
|
|
|
2995 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
|
|
2996 \penalty -300
|
|
|
2997 %
|
|
|
2998 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
|
|
2999 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
|
|
3000 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
|
|
3001 % we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
|
|
3002 %
|
|
|
3003 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
|
|
3004 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
|
|
3005 \leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
|
|
3006 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
|
|
3007 %
|
|
|
3008 % Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
|
|
3009 \nobreak
|
|
|
3010 }}
|
|
|
3011
|
|
|
3012 % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
|
|
|
3013 % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
|
|
|
3014 % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
|
|
3015 %
|
|
|
3016 \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3017 %
|
|
|
3018 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
|
|
3019 % affect previous text.
|
|
|
3020 \par
|
|
|
3021 %
|
|
|
3022 % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
|
|
3023 \parfillskip = 0in
|
|
|
3024 %
|
|
|
3025 % No extra space above this paragraph.
|
|
|
3026 \parskip = 0in
|
|
|
3027 %
|
|
|
3028 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
|
|
3029 \finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
|
|
3030 %
|
|
|
3031 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
|
|
3032 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
|
|
3033 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
|
|
3034 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
|
|
3035 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
|
|
3036 %
|
|
|
3037 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
|
|
3038 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
|
|
3039 \hangindent = 2em
|
|
|
3040 %
|
|
|
3041 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
|
|
3042 % with blank space.
|
|
|
3043 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
|
|
3044 %
|
|
|
3045 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
|
|
|
3046 \vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
|
|
3047 %
|
|
|
3048 % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
|
|
|
3049 % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
|
|
|
3050 \noindent
|
|
|
3051 %
|
|
|
3052 % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
|
|
|
3053 #1%
|
|
|
3054 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
|
|
3055 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
|
|
3056 % cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
|
|
3057 \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
|
|
|
3058 \def\tempb{#2}%
|
|
|
3059 \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
|
|
|
3060 \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
|
|
|
3061 \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
|
|
|
3062 %
|
|
|
3063 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
|
|
3064 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
|
|
3065 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
|
|
3066 \hfil\penalty50
|
|
|
3067 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
|
|
3068 %
|
|
|
3069 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
|
|
3070 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
|
|
3071 % \hbox ensues.
|
|
|
3072 \ifpdf
|
|
|
3073 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
|
|
3074 \else
|
|
|
3075 \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
|
|
|
3076 \fi
|
|
|
3077 \fi%
|
|
|
3078 \par
|
|
|
3079 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3080
|
|
|
3081 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
|
|
|
3082 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
|
|
3083 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
|
|
3084
|
|
|
3085 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
|
|
3086
|
|
|
3087 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
|
|
3088
|
|
|
3089 \def\secondary #1#2{
|
|
|
3090 {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
|
|
|
3091 \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
|
|
|
3092 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
|
|
|
3093 }}
|
|
|
3094
|
|
|
3095 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
|
|
3096 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
|
|
3097 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
|
|
3098 \catcode`\@=11
|
|
|
3099
|
|
|
3100 \newbox\partialpage
|
|
|
3101 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
3102
|
|
|
3103 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
|
|
3104 % Grab any single-column material above us.
|
|
|
3105 \output = {%
|
|
|
3106 %
|
|
|
3107 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
|
|
3108 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
|
|
3109 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
|
|
3110 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
|
|
3111 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
|
|
3112 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
|
|
3113 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
|
|
3114 \ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
|
|
3115 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
|
|
3116 \fi
|
|
|
3117 %
|
|
|
3118 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
|
|
3119 % Unvbox the main output page.
|
|
|
3120 \unvbox\PAGE
|
|
|
3121 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
|
|
3122 }%
|
|
|
3123 }%
|
|
|
3124 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
|
|
3125 %
|
|
|
3126 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
|
|
3127 \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
|
|
3128 %
|
|
|
3129 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
|
|
3130 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
|
|
3131 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
|
|
3132 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
|
|
3133 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
|
|
3134 %
|
|
|
3135 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
|
|
3136 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
|
|
3137 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
|
|
3138 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
|
|
3139 % as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
|
|
3140 %
|
|
|
3141 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
|
|
3142 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
|
|
3143 % been clobbered.
|
|
|
3144 %
|
|
|
3145 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
|
|
3146 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
|
|
3147 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
|
|
3148 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
3149 %
|
|
|
3150 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
|
|
3151 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
|
|
3152 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
|
|
|
3153 \vsize = 2\vsize
|
|
|
3154 }
|
|
|
3155
|
|
|
3156 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
|
|
3157 % the last.
|
|
|
3158 %
|
|
|
3159 \def\doublecolumnout{%
|
|
|
3160 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
|
|
3161 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
|
|
3162 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
|
|
3163 % previous page.
|
|
|
3164 \dimen@ = \vsize
|
|
|
3165 \divide\dimen@ by 2
|
|
|
3166 %
|
|
|
3167 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
|
|
3168 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
|
|
3169 \onepageout\pagesofar
|
|
|
3170 \unvbox255
|
|
|
3171 \penalty\outputpenalty
|
|
|
3172 }
|
|
|
3173 \def\pagesofar{%
|
|
|
3174 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
|
|
3175 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
|
|
3176 \unvbox\partialpage
|
|
|
3177 %
|
|
|
3178 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
3179 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
|
|
3180 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
|
|
3181 }
|
|
|
3182 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
|
|
3183 \output = {%
|
|
|
3184 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
|
|
3185 % current page, no automatic page break.
|
|
|
3186 \balancecolumns
|
|
|
3187 %
|
|
|
3188 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
|
|
3189 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
|
|
3190 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
|
|
3191 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
|
|
3192 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
|
|
3193 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
|
|
3194 % the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
|
|
3195 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
|
|
3196 }%
|
|
|
3197 \eject
|
|
|
3198 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
|
|
3199 %
|
|
|
3200 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
|
|
3201 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
|
|
3202 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
|
|
3203 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
|
|
3204 \pagegoal = \vsize
|
|
|
3205 }
|
|
|
3206 \def\balancecolumns{%
|
|
|
3207 % Called at the end of the double column material.
|
|
|
3208 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
|
|
3209 \dimen@ = \ht0
|
|
|
3210 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
|
|
3211 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
|
|
3212 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
|
|
3213 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
|
|
3214 \splittopskip = \topskip
|
|
|
3215 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
|
|
3216 {%
|
|
|
3217 \vbadness = 10000
|
|
|
3218 \loop
|
|
|
3219 \global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
|
|
3220 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
|
|
3221 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
|
|
3222 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
|
|
3223 \repeat
|
|
|
3224 }%
|
|
|
3225 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
|
|
3226 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
|
|
3227 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
|
|
3228 %
|
|
|
3229 \pagesofar
|
|
|
3230 }
|
|
|
3231 \catcode`\@ = \other
|
|
|
3232
|
|
|
3233
|
|
|
3234 \message{sectioning,}
|
|
|
3235 % Chapters, sections, etc.
|
|
|
3236
|
|
|
3237 \newcount\chapno
|
|
|
3238 \newcount\secno \secno=0
|
|
|
3239 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
|
|
3240 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
3241
|
|
|
3242 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
|
|
3243 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
|
|
3244 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
|
|
3245 % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
|
|
3246 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
|
|
3247 \def\appendixletter{%
|
|
|
3248 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
|
|
3249 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
|
|
3250 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
|
|
3251 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
|
|
3252 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
|
|
3253 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
|
|
3254 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
|
|
3255 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
|
|
3256 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
|
|
3257 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
|
|
3258 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
|
|
3259 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
|
|
3260 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
|
|
3261 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
|
|
3262 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
|
|
3263 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
|
|
3264 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
|
|
3265 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
|
|
3266 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
|
|
3267 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
|
|
3268 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
|
|
3269 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
|
|
3270 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
|
|
3271 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
|
|
3272 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
|
|
3273 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
|
|
3274 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
|
|
3275 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
|
|
3276 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
|
|
3277 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
|
|
3278 \else\char\the\appendixno
|
|
|
3279 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|
|
3280 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
3281
|
|
|
3282 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
|
|
|
3283 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
|
|
|
3284 \def\thischapter{}
|
|
|
3285 \def\thissection{}
|
|
|
3286
|
|
|
3287 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
|
|
3288 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
|
|
|
3289
|
|
|
3290 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
|
|
3291 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
|
|
3292 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
|
|
3293
|
|
|
3294 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
|
|
3295 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
|
|
3296 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
|
|
3297
|
|
|
3298 % Choose a numbered-heading macro
|
|
|
3299 % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
|
|
|
3300 % #2 is text for heading
|
|
|
3301 \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
|
|
3302 \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
|
3303 \chapterzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3304 \or
|
|
|
3305 \seczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3306 \or
|
|
|
3307 \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3308 \or
|
|
|
3309 \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3310 \else
|
|
|
3311 \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
|
|
3312 \chapterzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3313 \else
|
|
|
3314 \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3315 \fi
|
|
|
3316 \fi
|
|
|
3317 }
|
|
|
3318
|
|
|
3319 % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
|
|
|
3320 \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
|
|
3321 \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
|
3322 \appendixzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3323 \or
|
|
|
3324 \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3325 \or
|
|
|
3326 \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3327 \or
|
|
|
3328 \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3329 \else
|
|
|
3330 \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
|
|
3331 \appendixzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3332 \else
|
|
|
3333 \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3334 \fi
|
|
|
3335 \fi
|
|
|
3336 }
|
|
|
3337
|
|
|
3338 % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
|
|
|
3339 \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
|
|
3340 \ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
|
3341 \unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3342 \or
|
|
|
3343 \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3344 \or
|
|
|
3345 \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3346 \or
|
|
|
3347 \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3348 \else
|
|
|
3349 \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
|
|
3350 \unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
|
|
3351 \else
|
|
|
3352 \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
|
|
3353 \fi
|
|
|
3354 \fi
|
|
|
3355 }
|
|
|
3356
|
|
|
3357 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
|
|
|
3358 \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
|
|
|
3359 \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
|
|
|
3360 \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
|
|
3361 \def\chapterzzz #1{%
|
|
|
3362 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
3363 \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
|
|
|
3364 \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
|
|
|
3365 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3366 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
|
|
3367 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
|
|
|
3368 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
|
|
|
3369 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|
|
3370 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3371 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3372 {\the\chapno}}}%
|
|
|
3373 \temp
|
|
|
3374 \donoderef
|
|
|
3375 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|
|
3376 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|
|
3377 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
3378 }
|
|
|
3379
|
|
|
3380 \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
|
|
|
3381 \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
|
|
|
3382 \def\appendixzzz #1{%
|
|
|
3383 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
3384 \global\advance \appendixno by 1
|
|
|
3385 \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
|
|
|
3386 \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
|
|
|
3387 \gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3388 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
|
|
3389 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|
|
3390 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3391 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3392 {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
|
|
|
3393 \temp
|
|
|
3394 \appendixnoderef
|
|
|
3395 \global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
|
|
3396 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
|
|
3397 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
|
|
3398 }
|
|
|
3399
|
|
|
3400 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
|
|
3401 \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
|
|
|
3402 \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
|
|
|
3403
|
|
|
3404 % @top is like @unnumbered.
|
|
|
3405 \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
|
|
3406
|
|
|
3407 \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
|
|
3408 \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
|
|
3409 \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
|
|
|
3410 \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
3411 %
|
|
|
3412 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
|
|
3413 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
|
|
3414 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
|
|
3415 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
|
|
3416 % to be executed, not expanded).
|
|
|
3417 %
|
|
|
3418 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
|
|
3419 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
|
|
3420 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
|
|
3421 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
|
|
3422 % the toc entries.)
|
|
|
3423 \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
|
|
3424 %
|
|
|
3425 \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
|
|
|
3426 \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3427 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3428 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
|
|
|
3429 \temp
|
|
|
3430 \unnumbnoderef
|
|
|
3431 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
|
|
3432 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
|
|
3433 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
3434 }
|
|
|
3435
|
|
|
3436 % Sections.
|
|
|
3437 \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
|
|
|
3438 \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
|
|
3439 \def\seczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3440 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
|
|
3441 \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
|
|
|
3442 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3443 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3444 {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
|
|
|
3445 \temp
|
|
|
3446 \donoderef
|
|
|
3447 \nobreak
|
|
|
3448 }
|
|
|
3449
|
|
|
3450 \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
|
|
3451 \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
|
|
3452 \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
|
|
3453 \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
|
|
|
3454 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
|
|
3455 \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
|
|
|
3456 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3457 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3458 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
|
|
|
3459 \temp
|
|
|
3460 \appendixnoderef
|
|
|
3461 \nobreak
|
|
|
3462 }
|
|
|
3463
|
|
|
3464 \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
|
|
|
3465 \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
|
|
3466 \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3467 \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3468 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3469 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
|
|
|
3470 \temp
|
|
|
3471 \unnumbnoderef
|
|
|
3472 \nobreak
|
|
|
3473 }
|
|
|
3474
|
|
|
3475 % Subsections.
|
|
|
3476 \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3477 \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
|
|
3478 \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3479 \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3480 \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
|
|
3481 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3482 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3483 {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
|
|
3484 \temp
|
|
|
3485 \donoderef
|
|
|
3486 \nobreak
|
|
|
3487 }
|
|
|
3488
|
|
|
3489 \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3490 \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
|
|
3491 \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3492 \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3493 \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
|
|
3494 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3495 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3496 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
|
|
3497 \temp
|
|
|
3498 \appendixnoderef
|
|
|
3499 \nobreak
|
|
|
3500 }
|
|
|
3501
|
|
|
3502 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3503 \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
|
|
3504 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3505 \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3506 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3507 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
|
|
|
3508 {\the\toks0}}}%
|
|
|
3509 \temp
|
|
|
3510 \unnumbnoderef
|
|
|
3511 \nobreak
|
|
|
3512 }
|
|
|
3513
|
|
|
3514 % Subsubsections.
|
|
|
3515 \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3516 \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
|
|
3517 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3518 \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3519 \subsubsecheading {#1}
|
|
|
3520 {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
|
3521 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3522 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3523 {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
|
|
|
3524 \temp
|
|
|
3525 \donoderef
|
|
|
3526 \nobreak
|
|
|
3527 }
|
|
|
3528
|
|
|
3529 \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3530 \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
|
|
3531 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3532 \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
|
|
3533 \subsubsecheading {#1}
|
|
|
3534 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
|
3535 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3536 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
3537 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
|
|
|
3538 \temp
|
|
|
3539 \appendixnoderef
|
|
|
3540 \nobreak
|
|
|
3541 }
|
|
|
3542
|
|
|
3543 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
|
|
3544 \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
|
|
3545 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
|
|
3546 \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
|
3547 \toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
|
3548 \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
|
|
|
3549 {\the\toks0}}}%
|
|
|
3550 \temp
|
|
|
3551 \unnumbnoderef
|
|
|
3552 \nobreak
|
|
|
3553 }
|
|
|
3554
|
|
|
3555 % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
|
|
|
3556 % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
|
|
|
3557 \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
|
|
3558 \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
|
|
3559 \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
|
|
|
3560 \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3561 \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3562
|
|
|
3563 \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
|
|
|
3564 \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
|
|
|
3565 \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3566 \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
|
|
|
3567
|
|
|
3568 \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
|
|
|
3569 \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
|
|
|
3570 \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
|
|
|
3571 \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
|
|
|
3572
|
|
|
3573 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
|
|
3574 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
|
|
3575 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
|
|
3576 \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|
|
3577 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|
|
3578 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
3579
|
|
|
3580 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
|
|
3581
|
|
|
3582 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
|
|
3583 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
|
|
3584 % overlong headings to fold.
|
|
|
3585 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
|
|
3586 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
|
|
3587 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
|
|
3588 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
|
|
3589
|
|
|
3590
|
|
|
3591 \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
|
|
|
3592 \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
|
|
|
3593 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
|
|
3594 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3595 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
|
3596 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
|
|
3597
|
|
|
3598 \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
|
|
3599 \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
|
|
|
3600 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3601 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
|
3602 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
|
|
3603
|
|
|
3604 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
|
|
3605 \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
|
|
|
3606 \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
|
|
|
3607 \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
|
|
|
3608
|
|
|
3609 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
|
|
3610 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
|
|
3611 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
|
|
3612
|
|
|
3613 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
|
|
3614 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
|
|
3615
|
|
|
3616 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
3617
|
|
|
3618 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
|
|
3619 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
|
|
3620
|
|
|
3621 \newskip\chapheadingskip
|
|
|
3622
|
|
|
3623 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
|
|
3624 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|
|
3625 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
|
|
|
3626
|
|
|
3627 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
3628
|
|
|
3629 \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
|
|
3630 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
3631 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
|
|
3632 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
|
|
3633
|
|
|
3634 \def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
|
|
3635 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
3636 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
|
|
3637 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
|
|
3638 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
|
|
3639
|
|
|
3640 \def\CHAPPAGodd{
|
|
|
3641 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
|
3642 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|
|
3643 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|
|
3644 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
|
|
3645
|
|
|
3646 \CHAPPAGon
|
|
|
3647
|
|
|
3648 \def\CHAPFplain{
|
|
|
3649 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
|
|
|
3650 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
|
|
|
3651 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
|
|
|
3652
|
|
|
3653 % Plain chapter opening.
|
|
|
3654 % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
|
|
|
3655 \def\chfplain#1#2{%
|
|
|
3656 \pchapsepmacro
|
|
|
3657 {%
|
|
|
3658 \chapfonts \rm
|
|
|
3659 \def\chapnum{#2}%
|
|
|
3660 \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
|
|
3661 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
|
|
3662 \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
|
|
3663 \unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
|
|
3664 }%
|
|
|
3665 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
|
|
3666 \nobreak
|
|
|
3667 }
|
|
|
3668
|
|
|
3669 % Plain opening for unnumbered.
|
|
|
3670 \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
|
|
|
3671
|
|
|
3672 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
|
|
3673 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
|
|
3674 \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
|
|
|
3675 \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
|
|
|
3676 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
|
|
3677 \leftskip = \rightskip
|
|
|
3678 \parfillskip = 0pt
|
|
|
3679 }%
|
|
|
3680 \chfplain{#1}{}%
|
|
|
3681 }}
|
|
|
3682
|
|
|
3683 \CHAPFplain % The default
|
|
|
3684
|
|
|
3685 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
|
|
3686 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3687 \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
|
3688 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
|
|
3689 }
|
|
|
3690
|
|
|
3691 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
|
|
3692 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
|
|
3693 \par\penalty 5000 %
|
|
|
3694 }
|
|
|
3695
|
|
|
3696 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
|
|
3697 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
|
3698 \parindent=0pt
|
|
|
3699 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
|
|
3700 }
|
|
|
3701
|
|
|
3702 \def\CHAPFopen{
|
|
|
3703 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
|
|
3704 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
|
|
|
3705 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
|
|
3706
|
|
|
3707
|
|
|
3708 % Section titles.
|
|
|
3709 \newskip\secheadingskip
|
|
|
3710 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
|
|
|
3711 \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
|
|
|
3712 \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
|
|
|
3713
|
|
|
3714 % Subsection titles.
|
|
|
3715 \newskip \subsecheadingskip
|
|
|
3716 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
|
|
|
3717 \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
|
|
|
3718 \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
|
|
|
3719
|
|
|
3720 % Subsubsection titles.
|
|
|
3721 \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
|
|
|
3722 \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
|
|
|
3723 \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
|
|
|
3724 \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
|
|
|
3725
|
|
|
3726
|
|
|
3727 % Print any size section title.
|
|
|
3728 %
|
|
|
3729 % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
|
|
|
3730 % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
|
|
|
3731 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
3732 {%
|
|
|
3733 \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
|
|
|
3734 \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
|
|
|
3735 }%
|
|
|
3736 {%
|
|
|
3737 % Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
|
|
3738 \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
|
|
|
3739 %
|
|
|
3740 % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
|
|
|
3741 \def\secnum{#2}%
|
|
|
3742 \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
|
|
3743 %
|
|
|
3744 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
|
|
3745 \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
|
|
|
3746 \unhbox0 #3}%
|
|
|
3747 }%
|
|
|
3748 \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
|
|
|
3749 }
|
|
|
3750
|
|
|
3751
|
|
|
3752 \message{toc,}
|
|
|
3753 % Table of contents.
|
|
|
3754 \newwrite\tocfile
|
|
|
3755
|
|
|
3756 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
|
|
3757 % Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
|
|
|
3758 % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
|
|
|
3759 %
|
|
|
3760 % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
|
|
|
3761 % given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
|
|
|
3762 %
|
|
|
3763 \newif\iftocfileopened
|
|
|
3764 \def\writetocentry#1{%
|
|
|
3765 \iftocfileopened\else
|
|
|
3766 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3767 \global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
|
|
3768 \fi
|
|
|
3769 \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
|
|
|
3770 }
|
|
|
3771
|
|
|
3772 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
|
|
3773 \newcount\savepageno
|
|
|
3774 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
|
|
3775
|
|
|
3776 % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
|
|
|
3777 % to \tocfile.
|
|
|
3778 %
|
|
|
3779 \def\startcontents#1{%
|
|
|
3780 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
|
|
3781 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
|
|
3782 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
|
|
3783 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
|
|
3784 \contentsalignmacro
|
|
|
3785 \immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
|
|
3786 %
|
|
|
3787 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
|
|
3788 % It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
|
|
3789 \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
|
|
|
3790 \savepageno = \pageno
|
|
|
3791 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
|
|
3792 \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
|
|
|
3793 % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
|
|
|
3794 % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
|
|
|
3795 %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
|
|
|
3796 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
|
|
3797 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
|
|
3798 %
|
|
|
3799 % Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
|
|
3800 \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
|
|
3801 }
|
|
|
3802
|
|
|
3803
|
|
|
3804 % Normal (long) toc.
|
|
|
3805 \def\contents{%
|
|
|
3806 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
|
|
3807 \openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3808 \ifeof 1 \else
|
|
|
3809 \closein 1
|
|
|
3810 \input \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3811 \fi
|
|
|
3812 \vfill \eject
|
|
|
3813 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
|
|
3814 \pdfmakeoutlines
|
|
|
3815 \endgroup
|
|
|
3816 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
|
|
3817 \pageno = \savepageno
|
|
|
3818 }
|
|
|
3819
|
|
|
3820 % And just the chapters.
|
|
|
3821 \def\summarycontents{%
|
|
|
3822 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
|
|
3823 %
|
|
|
3824 \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
|
|
|
3825 \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
|
|
|
3826 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
|
|
3827 \secfonts
|
|
|
3828 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
|
|
|
3829 \rm
|
|
|
3830 \hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
|
|
3831 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
|
|
3832 \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
|
|
|
3833 \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
3834 \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
|
|
|
3835 \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
3836 \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
|
|
|
3837 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
|
|
3838 \openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3839 \ifeof 1 \else
|
|
|
3840 \closein 1
|
|
|
3841 \input \jobname.toc
|
|
|
3842 \fi
|
|
|
3843 \vfill \eject
|
|
|
3844 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
|
|
3845 \endgroup
|
|
|
3846 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
|
|
3847 \pageno = \savepageno
|
|
|
3848 }
|
|
|
3849 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
|
|
3850
|
|
|
3851 \ifpdf
|
|
|
3852 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
|
|
|
3853 \fi
|
|
|
3854
|
|
|
3855 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
|
|
3856 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
|
|
3857 % The last argument is the page number.
|
|
|
3858 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
|
|
3859
|
|
|
3860 % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
|
|
|
3861 \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
|
|
|
3862
|
|
|
3863 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
|
|
|
3864 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
3865 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
|
|
|
3866 }
|
|
|
3867
|
|
|
3868 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
|
|
3869 % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
|
|
3870 % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
|
|
|
3871 % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
|
|
|
3872 % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
|
|
|
3873 %
|
|
|
3874 \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
|
|
|
3875 %
|
|
|
3876 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
|
|
3877 % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language.
|
|
|
3878 \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}%
|
|
|
3879 \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
|
|
|
3880 %
|
|
|
3881 % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
|
|
|
3882 % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
|
|
|
3883 \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
|
|
|
3884 \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
|
|
|
3885 %
|
|
|
3886 % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
|
|
3887 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
|
|
3888 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
|
|
3889 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
|
|
3890 \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
|
|
|
3891 \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
|
|
|
3892 }
|
|
|
3893
|
|
|
3894 \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3895 \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
|
|
|
3896
|
|
|
3897 % Sections.
|
|
|
3898 \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
|
3899 \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3900
|
|
|
3901 % Subsections.
|
|
|
3902 \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
|
|
|
3903 \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3904
|
|
|
3905 % And subsubsections.
|
|
|
3906 \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
|
|
3907 \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
|
|
|
3908 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
3909
|
|
|
3910 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
|
|
3911 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
|
|
|
3912
|
|
|
3913 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
|
|
3914 % page number.
|
|
|
3915 %
|
|
|
3916 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
|
|
3917 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
|
|
3918 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
|
|
3919 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
|
|
3920 \begingroup
|
|
|
3921 \chapentryfonts
|
|
|
3922 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
|
3923 \endgroup
|
|
|
3924 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
|
|
3925 }
|
|
|
3926
|
|
|
3927 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3928 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
|
|
3929 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
|
3930 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3931
|
|
|
3932 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3933 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
|
|
3934 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
|
3935 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3936
|
|
|
3937 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3938 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
|
|
3939 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
|
3940 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3941
|
|
|
3942 % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
|
|
|
3943 % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
|
|
|
3944 % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
|
|
|
3945 % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
|
|
|
3946 \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
|
3947 \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
|
|
|
3948 % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
|
|
|
3949 % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
|
|
|
3950 % have to do the usual translation tricks.
|
|
|
3951 \entry{#1}{#2}%
|
|
|
3952 \endgroup}
|
|
|
3953
|
|
|
3954 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
|
|
3955 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
|
|
3956
|
|
|
3957 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|
|
3958 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|
|
3959
|
|
|
3960 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
|
|
3961 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|
|
3962 \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
|
|
3963 \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
|
|
3964
|
|
|
3965
|
|
|
3966 \message{environments,}
|
|
|
3967 % @foo ... @end foo.
|
|
|
3968
|
|
|
3969 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
|
|
|
3970 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
|
|
3971 % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
|
|
|
3972 \newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox
|
|
|
3973 \newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox
|
|
|
3974 \newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox
|
|
|
3975
|
|
|
3976 %{\tentt
|
|
|
3977 %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
|
|
|
3978 %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
|
|
|
3979 %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
|
|
|
3980 %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
|
|
|
3981 % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
|
|
|
3982 %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
|
|
|
3983 % depth .1ex\hfil}
|
|
|
3984 %}
|
|
|
3985
|
|
|
3986 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
|
|
3987 \def\point{$\star$}
|
|
|
3988 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3989 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3990 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3991 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
|
|
3992
|
|
|
3993 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
|
|
3994 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
|
|
3995 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
|
|
3996 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
|
|
3997 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
|
|
3998
|
|
|
3999 \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
|
|
4000 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
|
|
4001 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
|
|
4002 \vbox{
|
|
|
4003 \hrule height\dimen2
|
|
|
4004 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
|
|
4005 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
|
|
4006 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
|
|
4007 \hrule height\dimen2}
|
|
|
4008 \hfil}
|
|
|
4009
|
|
|
4010 % The @error{} command.
|
|
|
4011 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
|
|
4012
|
|
|
4013 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
|
|
4014 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
|
|
4015 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
|
|
4016
|
|
|
4017 \def\tex{\begingroup
|
|
|
4018 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
|
|
4019 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
|
|
4020 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
|
|
|
4021 \catcode `\%=14
|
|
|
4022 \catcode 43=12 % plus
|
|
|
4023 \catcode`\"=12
|
|
|
4024 \catcode`\==12
|
|
|
4025 \catcode`\|=12
|
|
|
4026 \catcode`\<=12
|
|
|
4027 \catcode`\>=12
|
|
|
4028 \escapechar=`\\
|
|
|
4029 %
|
|
|
4030 \let\b=\ptexb
|
|
|
4031 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
|
|
4032 \let\c=\ptexc
|
|
|
4033 \let\,=\ptexcomma
|
|
|
4034 \let\.=\ptexdot
|
|
|
4035 \let\dots=\ptexdots
|
|
|
4036 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
|
|
4037 \let\!=\ptexexclam
|
|
|
4038 \let\i=\ptexi
|
|
|
4039 \let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
|
|
4040 \let\+=\tabalign
|
|
|
4041 \let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
|
|
4042 \let\*=\ptexstar
|
|
|
4043 \let\t=\ptext
|
|
|
4044 %
|
|
|
4045 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
|
|
4046 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
|
|
4047 \def\@{@}%
|
|
|
4048 \let\Etex=\endgroup}
|
|
|
4049
|
|
|
4050 % Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
|
|
|
4051 % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
|
|
|
4052 % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
|
|
4053
|
|
|
4054 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
|
|
4055 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
|
|
4056
|
|
|
4057 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
|
|
4058 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
|
|
4059 % have any width.
|
|
|
4060 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
|
|
4061
|
|
|
4062 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
|
|
4063 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
|
|
4064 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
|
|
4065 % should produce a line of output anyway.
|
|
|
4066 %
|
|
|
4067 {\obeyspaces %
|
|
|
4068 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
|
|
|
4069
|
|
|
4070 % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
|
|
|
4071 % for use in \parsearg.
|
|
|
4072 {\sepspaces%
|
|
|
4073 \global\let\obeyedspace= }
|
|
|
4074
|
|
|
4075 % This space is always present above and below environments.
|
|
|
4076 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
|
|
4077
|
|
|
4078 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
|
|
4079 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
|
|
4080 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
|
|
4081 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
|
|
|
4082 %
|
|
|
4083 \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
|
|
4084 \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
|
|
4085 \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
|
|
|
4086
|
|
|
4087 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
|
|
4088
|
|
|
4089 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
|
|
|
4090 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
|
|
4091
|
|
|
4092 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
|
|
4093 % environment contents.
|
|
|
4094 \font\circle=lcircle10
|
|
|
4095 \newdimen\circthick
|
|
|
4096 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
|
|
4097 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
|
|
4098 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
|
|
4099 %
|
|
|
4100 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
|
|
4101 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
|
|
4102 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
|
|
4103 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
|
|
4104 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|
|
4105 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
|
|
4106 \hskip\rskip}}
|
|
|
4107 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|
|
4108 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
|
|
4109 \hskip\rskip}}
|
|
|
4110 %
|
|
|
4111 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
|
|
4112
|
|
|
4113 \long\def\cartouche{%
|
|
|
4114 \begingroup
|
|
|
4115 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
|
|
4116 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
|
|
|
4117 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
|
|
4118 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
|
|
4119 \cartouter=\hsize
|
|
|
4120 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
|
|
4121 % side, and for 6pt waste from
|
|
|
4122 % each corner char, and rule thickness
|
|
|
4123 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
|
|
4124 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
|
|
4125 \let\nonarrowing=\comment
|
|
|
4126 \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
4127 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
|
|
4128 \carttop
|
|
|
4129 \hbox\bgroup
|
|
|
4130 \hskip\lskip
|
|
|
4131 \vrule\kern3pt
|
|
|
4132 \vbox\bgroup
|
|
|
4133 \hsize=\cartinner
|
|
|
4134 \kern3pt
|
|
|
4135 \begingroup
|
|
|
4136 \baselineskip=\normbskip
|
|
|
4137 \lineskip=\normlskip
|
|
|
4138 \parskip=\normpskip
|
|
|
4139 \vskip -\parskip
|
|
|
4140 \def\Ecartouche{%
|
|
|
4141 \endgroup
|
|
|
4142 \kern3pt
|
|
|
4143 \egroup
|
|
|
4144 \kern3pt\vrule
|
|
|
4145 \hskip\rskip
|
|
|
4146 \egroup
|
|
|
4147 \cartbot
|
|
|
4148 \egroup
|
|
|
4149 \endgroup
|
|
|
4150 }}
|
|
|
4151
|
|
|
4152
|
|
|
4153 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
|
|
4154 % inside a group.
|
|
|
4155 \def\nonfillstart{%
|
|
|
4156 \aboveenvbreak
|
|
|
4157 \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
|
|
|
4158 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
|
|
4159 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
|
|
4160 \singlespace
|
|
|
4161 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
|
|
4162 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
|
|
4163 \parskip = 0pt
|
|
|
4164 \parindent = 0pt
|
|
|
4165 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
|
|
4166 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
|
|
|
4167 % at next level down.
|
|
|
4168 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|
|
4169 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
4170 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
|
|
4171 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
|
|
4172 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
|
|
4173 \fi
|
|
|
4174 }
|
|
|
4175
|
|
|
4176 % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
|
|
|
4177 % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
|
|
|
4178 %
|
|
|
4179 % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
|
|
|
4180 % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
|
|
|
4181 % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
|
|
|
4182 % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
|
|
|
4183 % the environment.
|
|
|
4184 %
|
|
|
4185 \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
|
|
|
4186
|
|
|
4187 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
|
|
|
4188 \def\lisp{\begingroup
|
|
|
4189 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
4190 \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
4191 \tt
|
|
|
4192 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
|
|
4193 \gobble % eat return
|
|
|
4194 }
|
|
|
4195
|
|
|
4196 % @example: Same as @lisp.
|
|
|
4197 \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
|
|
4198
|
|
|
4199 % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
|
|
|
4200 % redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
|
|
|
4201 % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
|
|
|
4202 % whatever) command.
|
|
|
4203 %
|
|
|
4204 % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
|
|
|
4205 % @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
|
|
|
4206 %
|
|
|
4207 \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
|
|
|
4208 \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
|
|
4209 \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
|
|
|
4210 \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
|
|
4211
|
|
|
4212 % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
|
|
|
4213 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
|
|
4214 \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
|
|
|
4215 \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
|
|
4216 \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
|
|
4217 \smallfonts
|
|
|
4218 \lisp
|
|
|
4219 }
|
|
|
4220
|
|
|
4221 % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
|
|
4222 %
|
|
|
4223 \def\display{\begingroup
|
|
|
4224 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
4225 \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
4226 \gobble
|
|
|
4227 }
|
|
|
4228
|
|
|
4229 % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
|
|
|
4230 %
|
|
|
4231 \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
|
|
|
4232 \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
|
|
4233 \smallfonts \rm
|
|
|
4234 \display
|
|
|
4235 }
|
|
|
4236
|
|
|
4237 % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
|
|
4238 %
|
|
|
4239 \def\format{\begingroup
|
|
|
4240 \let\nonarrowing = t
|
|
|
4241 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
4242 \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
4243 \gobble
|
|
|
4244 }
|
|
|
4245
|
|
|
4246 % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
|
|
|
4247 %
|
|
|
4248 \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
|
|
|
4249 \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
|
|
4250 \smallfonts \rm
|
|
|
4251 \format
|
|
|
4252 }
|
|
|
4253
|
|
|
4254 % @flushleft (same as @format).
|
|
|
4255 %
|
|
|
4256 \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
|
|
|
4257
|
|
|
4258 % @flushright.
|
|
|
4259 %
|
|
|
4260 \def\flushright{\begingroup
|
|
|
4261 \let\nonarrowing = t
|
|
|
4262 \nonfillstart
|
|
|
4263 \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
|
|
|
4264 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
|
|
4265 \gobble
|
|
|
4266 }
|
|
|
4267
|
|
|
4268 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
|
|
4269 % and narrows the margins.
|
|
|
4270 %
|
|
|
4271 \def\quotation{%
|
|
|
4272 \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
|
|
|
4273 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
|
|
4274 \singlespace
|
|
|
4275 \parindent=0pt
|
|
|
4276 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
|
|
4277 % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
|
|
|
4278 \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
|
|
|
4279 %
|
|
|
4280 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
|
|
4281 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|
|
4282 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
4283 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
4284 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
|
|
4285 \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
|
|
4286 \fi
|
|
|
4287 }
|
|
|
4288
|
|
|
4289
|
|
|
4290 \message{defuns,}
|
|
|
4291 % @defun etc.
|
|
|
4292
|
|
|
4293 % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
|
|
|
4294 \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
4295
|
|
|
4296 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
|
|
4297 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
|
|
4298 \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
|
|
|
4299 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
|
|
4300
|
|
|
4301 \newcount\parencount
|
|
|
4302 % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
|
|
|
4303 % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
|
|
|
4304 \def\activeparens{%
|
|
|
4305 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
|
|
|
4306 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
|
|
|
4307
|
|
|
4308 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
|
|
4309 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
|
|
4310
|
|
|
4311 {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
|
|
|
4312
|
|
|
4313 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
|
|
4314 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
|
|
4315 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
|
|
4316 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
|
|
4317 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
|
|
4318
|
|
|
4319 \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
|
|
|
4320 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
|
|
4321 % This is used to turn on special parens
|
|
|
4322 % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
|
|
|
4323 \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
|
|
|
4324
|
|
|
4325 % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
|
|
|
4326 % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
|
|
|
4327 \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
|
|
|
4328 \global\advance\parencount by 1
|
|
|
4329 }
|
|
|
4330 %
|
|
|
4331 % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
|
|
|
4332 \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
|
|
4333 %
|
|
|
4334 \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
|
|
|
4335 % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
|
|
|
4336 \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
|
|
|
4337 \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
|
|
|
4338 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
|
|
4339 \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
|
|
|
4340 %
|
|
|
4341 \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
|
|
|
4342 } % End of definition inside \activeparens
|
|
|
4343 %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
|
|
|
4344 %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
|
|
|
4345 \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
|
|
4346 \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
|
|
|
4347 \let\ampnr = \&
|
|
|
4348 \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
|
|
|
4349 \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
|
|
|
4350
|
|
|
4351 % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
|
|
|
4352 {
|
|
|
4353 \catcode`& = 13
|
|
|
4354 \global\let& = \ampnr
|
|
|
4355 }
|
|
|
4356
|
|
|
4357 % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
|
|
|
4358 % #1 should be the function name.
|
|
|
4359 % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
|
|
|
4360
|
|
|
4361 \def\defname #1#2{%
|
|
|
4362 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
|
|
|
4363 % outside the @def...
|
|
|
4364 \dimen2=\leftskip
|
|
|
4365 \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4366 \noindent
|
|
|
4367 \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
|
|
|
4368 \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
|
|
|
4369 \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
|
|
|
4370 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
|
|
|
4371 % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
|
|
|
4372 % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
|
|
|
4373 % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
|
|
|
4374 {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
|
|
|
4375 % so that \rightline will obey them.
|
|
|
4376 \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
|
|
|
4377 \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
|
|
|
4378 % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
|
|
|
4379 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
|
|
4380 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4381 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4382 {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
|
|
|
4383 }
|
|
|
4384
|
|
|
4385 % Actually process the body of a definition
|
|
|
4386 % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
|
|
|
4387 % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
|
|
|
4388 % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
|
|
|
4389 % such as \defunheader.
|
|
|
4390
|
|
|
4391 \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
|
|
|
4392 \medbreak %
|
|
|
4393 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
4394 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
4395 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4396 \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
|
|
|
4397 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4398 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4399 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4400 \begingroup %
|
|
|
4401 \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
|
|
|
4402 \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
|
|
|
4403
|
|
|
4404 % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
|
|
|
4405 % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
|
|
|
4406 % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
|
|
|
4407 % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
|
|
|
4408 %
|
|
|
4409 \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
4410 \medbreak %
|
|
|
4411 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
4412 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
4413 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4414 \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
|
|
4415 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4416 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4417 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4418 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
|
|
|
4419
|
|
|
4420 % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
|
|
|
4421 % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
|
|
|
4422 % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
|
|
|
4423 % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
|
|
|
4424 % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
|
|
|
4425 % #5 is the method's return type.
|
|
|
4426 %
|
|
|
4427 \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
|
|
|
4428 \medbreak
|
|
|
4429 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4430 \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
|
|
|
4431 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4432 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4433 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4434 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
|
|
|
4435
|
|
|
4436 % Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
|
|
|
4437 % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
|
|
|
4438 % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
|
|
|
4439 % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
|
|
|
4440 % input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
|
|
|
4441 % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
|
|
|
4442 %
|
|
|
4443 \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
|
|
|
4444 \medbreak
|
|
|
4445 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4446 \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
|
|
|
4447 \def#4{##1}%
|
|
|
4448 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
|
|
|
4449 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4450 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4451 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4452 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
|
|
|
4453
|
|
|
4454 \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
4455 \medbreak %
|
|
|
4456 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
4457 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
4458 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4459 \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
|
|
4460 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
|
|
4461 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4462 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4463 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4464 \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
|
|
|
4465
|
|
|
4466 % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
|
|
|
4467 % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
|
|
|
4468 % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
|
|
|
4469
|
|
|
4470 \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
|
|
|
4471 \medbreak %
|
|
|
4472 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
4473 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
4474 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4475 \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
|
|
|
4476 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4477 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4478 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4479 \begingroup %
|
|
|
4480 \catcode 61=\active %
|
|
|
4481 \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
|
|
|
4482
|
|
|
4483 % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
|
|
|
4484 % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
|
|
|
4485 %
|
|
|
4486 \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4487 \begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
4488 \medbreak %
|
|
|
4489 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
4490 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
4491 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4492 \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
|
|
4493 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4494 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4495 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4496 \begingroup\obeylines
|
|
|
4497 }
|
|
|
4498
|
|
|
4499 \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
|
|
|
4500 \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
|
|
4501 \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
|
|
|
4502 }
|
|
|
4503
|
|
|
4504 % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
|
|
|
4505 % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
|
|
|
4506 % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
|
|
|
4507 % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
|
|
|
4508 %
|
|
|
4509 % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
|
|
|
4510 % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
|
|
|
4511 % won't strip off the braces.
|
|
|
4512 %
|
|
|
4513 \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
|
|
|
4514 \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
|
|
4515 \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
|
|
|
4516 }
|
|
|
4517
|
|
|
4518 % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
|
|
|
4519 % braces (if any). That's what this does.
|
|
|
4520 %
|
|
|
4521 \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
|
|
|
4522
|
|
|
4523 % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
|
|
|
4524 % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
|
|
|
4525 % (which might be empty) the arguments.
|
|
|
4526 %
|
|
|
4527 \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4528 #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
|
|
|
4529 }%
|
|
|
4530
|
|
|
4531 \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
|
|
4532 \medbreak %
|
|
|
4533 % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
|
|
4534 % so that it will exit this group.
|
|
|
4535 \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
|
|
4536 \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
|
|
4537 \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
|
|
4538 \parindent=0in
|
|
|
4539 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
|
4540 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
|
4541 \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
|
|
|
4542
|
|
|
4543 % Split up #2 at the first space token.
|
|
|
4544 % call #1 with two arguments:
|
|
|
4545 % the first is all of #2 before the space token,
|
|
|
4546 % the second is all of #2 after that space token.
|
|
|
4547 % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
|
|
|
4548 % and the second is passed as empty.
|
|
|
4549
|
|
|
4550 {\obeylines
|
|
|
4551 \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
|
|
|
4552 \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
|
|
|
4553 \ifx\relax #3%
|
|
|
4554 #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
|
|
|
4555
|
|
|
4556 % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
|
|
|
4557
|
|
|
4558 % Define @defun.
|
|
|
4559
|
|
|
4560 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
|
|
|
4561 % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
|
|
4562
|
|
|
4563 \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
|
|
|
4564 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
|
|
4565 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
|
|
4566 % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
|
|
|
4567 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
|
|
|
4568 #1%
|
|
|
4569 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
|
|
|
4570 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
|
|
|
4571 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4572 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
4573 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
|
|
4574 }
|
|
|
4575
|
|
|
4576 \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
|
|
|
4577 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
|
|
4578 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
|
|
4579 % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
|
|
|
4580 \boldbraxnoamp
|
|
|
4581 \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
|
|
|
4582 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4583 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
|
4584 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
|
|
4585 }
|
|
|
4586
|
|
|
4587 % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
|
|
|
4588
|
|
|
4589 % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
|
|
|
4590
|
|
|
4591 \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
|
|
|
4592
|
|
|
4593 \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
|
4594 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4595 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4596 }
|
|
|
4597
|
|
|
4598 % @defun == @deffn Function
|
|
|
4599
|
|
|
4600 \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
|
|
|
4601
|
|
|
4602 \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4603 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
|
|
|
4604 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4605 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4606 }
|
|
|
4607
|
|
|
4608 % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
|
|
4609
|
|
|
4610 \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
|
|
|
4611
|
|
|
4612 % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
|
|
|
4613 \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
|
|
|
4614 % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
|
|
|
4615 \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
|
|
|
4616 \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4617 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
|
|
|
4618 \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4619 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4620 }
|
|
|
4621
|
|
|
4622 % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
|
|
4623
|
|
|
4624 \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
|
|
|
4625
|
|
|
4626 % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
|
|
|
4627 % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
|
|
|
4628 \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
|
|
|
4629
|
|
|
4630 % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
|
|
|
4631 \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
|
|
|
4632 % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
|
|
|
4633 \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
|
|
|
4634 \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4635 \begingroup
|
|
|
4636 \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
|
|
|
4637 % at least some C++ text from working
|
|
|
4638 \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
|
|
|
4639 \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4640 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4641 }
|
|
|
4642
|
|
|
4643 % @defmac == @deffn Macro
|
|
|
4644
|
|
|
4645 \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
|
|
|
4646
|
|
|
4647 \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4648 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
|
|
|
4649 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4650 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4651 }
|
|
|
4652
|
|
|
4653 % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
|
|
|
4654
|
|
|
4655 \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
|
|
|
4656
|
|
|
4657 \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4658 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
|
|
|
4659 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4660 \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
|
|
4661 }
|
|
|
4662
|
|
|
4663 % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
|
|
|
4664 %
|
|
|
4665 \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
|
|
|
4666 \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
|
|
|
4667 %
|
|
|
4668 \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4669 \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
|
|
|
4670 \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
|
|
|
4671 \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4672 }
|
|
|
4673
|
|
|
4674 % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
|
|
|
4675 %
|
|
|
4676 \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
|
|
|
4677 \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
|
|
|
4678 \deftypeopcategory}
|
|
|
4679 %
|
|
|
4680 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
|
|
|
4681 \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
|
|
|
4682 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
|
|
4683 \begingroup
|
|
|
4684 \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}
|
|
|
4685 {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
|
|
|
4686 \deftypefunargs{#4}%
|
|
|
4687 \endgroup
|
|
|
4688 }
|
|
|
4689
|
|
|
4690 % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
|
|
|
4691 %
|
|
|
4692 \def\deftypemethod{%
|
|
|
4693 \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
|
|
|
4694 %
|
|
|
4695 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
|
|
|
4696 \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
|
|
|
4697 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
|
|
4698 \begingroup
|
|
|
4699 \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
|
|
|
4700 \deftypefunargs{#4}%
|
|
|
4701 \endgroup
|
|
|
4702 }
|
|
|
4703
|
|
|
4704 % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
|
|
|
4705 %
|
|
|
4706 \def\deftypeivar{%
|
|
|
4707 \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
|
|
|
4708 %
|
|
|
4709 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
|
|
|
4710 \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4711 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
|
|
|
4712 \begingroup
|
|
|
4713 \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
|
|
|
4714 \defvarargs{#3}%
|
|
|
4715 \endgroup
|
|
|
4716 }
|
|
|
4717
|
|
|
4718 % @defmethod == @defop Method
|
|
|
4719 %
|
|
|
4720 \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
|
|
|
4721 %
|
|
|
4722 % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
|
|
|
4723 \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4724 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
|
|
4725 \begingroup
|
|
|
4726 \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
|
|
|
4727 \defunargs{#3}%
|
|
|
4728 \endgroup
|
|
|
4729 }
|
|
|
4730
|
|
|
4731 % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
|
|
|
4732
|
|
|
4733 \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
|
|
|
4734 \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
|
|
|
4735
|
|
|
4736 \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4737 \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4738 \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
|
|
|
4739 \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4740 }
|
|
|
4741
|
|
|
4742 % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
|
|
|
4743 %
|
|
|
4744 \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
|
|
|
4745 %
|
|
|
4746 \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
|
|
|
4747 \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
|
|
|
4748 \begingroup
|
|
|
4749 \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
|
|
|
4750 \defvarargs{#3}%
|
|
|
4751 \endgroup
|
|
|
4752 }
|
|
|
4753
|
|
|
4754 % @defvar
|
|
|
4755 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
|
|
|
4756 % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
|
|
|
4757 % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
|
|
4758 \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
|
|
|
4759 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4760 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
|
|
|
4761
|
|
|
4762 % @defvr Counter foo-count
|
|
|
4763
|
|
|
4764 \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
|
|
|
4765
|
|
|
4766 \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
|
4767 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
|
|
4768
|
|
|
4769 % @defvar == @defvr Variable
|
|
|
4770
|
|
|
4771 \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
|
|
|
4772
|
|
|
4773 \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4774 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
|
|
|
4775 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4776 }
|
|
|
4777
|
|
|
4778 % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
|
|
|
4779
|
|
|
4780 \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
|
|
|
4781
|
|
|
4782 \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
|
|
4783 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
|
|
|
4784 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
|
|
4785 }
|
|
|
4786
|
|
|
4787 % @deftypevar int foobar
|
|
|
4788
|
|
|
4789 \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
|
|
|
4790
|
|
|
4791 % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
|
|
|
4792 % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
|
|
|
4793 \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
|
|
|
4794 \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
|
|
|
4795 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
|
|
|
4796 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4797 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
|
|
4798 \endgroup}
|
|
|
4799 \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
|
|
|
4800
|
|
|
4801 % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
|
|
|
4802
|
|
|
4803 \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
|
|
|
4804
|
|
|
4805 \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
|
|
|
4806 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
|
|
|
4807 \interlinepenalty=10000
|
|
|
4808 \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
|
|
4809 \endgroup}
|
|
|
4810
|
|
|
4811 % Now define @deftp
|
|
|
4812 % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
|
|
|
4813
|
|
|
4814 \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
|
|
|
4815
|
|
|
4816 % @deftp Class window height width ...
|
|
|
4817
|
|
|
4818 \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
|
|
|
4819
|
|
|
4820 \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
|
4821 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
|
|
4822
|
|
|
4823 % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
|
|
|
4824 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
|
|
|
4825 %
|
|
|
4826 \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4827 \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4828 \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4829 \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4830 \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4831 \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4832 \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4833 \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4834 \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4835 \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4836 \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4837 \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4838 \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4839 \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4840 \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4841 \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4842 \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4843 \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4844 \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
|
|
|
4845
|
|
|
4846
|
|
|
4847 \message{macros,}
|
|
|
4848 % @macro.
|
|
|
4849
|
|
|
4850 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
|
|
4851 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
|
|
4852 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
|
|
4853 \newwrite\macscribble
|
|
|
4854 \def\scanmacro#1{%
|
|
|
4855 \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
|
|
|
4856 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
|
|
4857 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
|
|
|
4858 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
|
|
|
4859 \toks0={#1\endinput}%
|
|
|
4860 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
|
|
4861 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
|
|
4862 \immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
|
|
4863 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
|
|
4864 \input \jobname.tmp
|
|
|
4865 \endgroup
|
|
|
4866 }
|
|
|
4867 \else
|
|
|
4868 \def\scanmacro#1{%
|
|
|
4869 \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
|
|
|
4870 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
|
|
4871 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
|
|
|
4872 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
|
|
|
4873 \fi
|
|
|
4874
|
|
|
4875 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
|
|
4876 \newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
|
|
4877 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
|
|
4878 \def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
|
|
|
4879 % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
|
|
|
4880
|
|
|
4881 % Utility routines.
|
|
|
4882 % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
|
|
|
4883 \def\cslet#1#2{%
|
|
|
4884 \expandafter\expandafter
|
|
|
4885 \expandafter\let
|
|
|
4886 \expandafter\expandafter
|
|
|
4887 \csname#1\endcsname
|
|
|
4888 \csname#2\endcsname}
|
|
|
4889
|
|
|
4890 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
|
|
4891 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
|
|
4892 {\catcode`\@=11
|
|
|
4893 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
|
|
4894 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
|
|
4895 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
|
|
4896 \def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
|
|
4897 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
|
|
4898 }
|
|
|
4899
|
|
|
4900 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
|
|
4901 {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
|
|
|
4902 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
|
|
4903 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
|
|
4904 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
|
|
4905 }
|
|
|
4906
|
|
|
4907 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
|
|
4908 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
|
|
4909 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
|
|
4910
|
|
|
4911 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
|
|
4912 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
|
|
4913 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
|
|
4914
|
|
|
4915 \def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
|
|
4916 \catcode`\~=12
|
|
|
4917 \catcode`\^=12
|
|
|
4918 \catcode`\_=12
|
|
|
4919 \catcode`\|=12
|
|
|
4920 \catcode`\<=12
|
|
|
4921 \catcode`\>=12
|
|
|
4922 \catcode`\+=12
|
|
|
4923 \catcode`\{=12
|
|
|
4924 \catcode`\}=12
|
|
|
4925 \catcode`\@=12
|
|
|
4926 \catcode`\^^M=12
|
|
|
4927 \usembodybackslash}
|
|
|
4928
|
|
|
4929 \def\macroargctxt{%
|
|
|
4930 \catcode`\~=12
|
|
|
4931 \catcode`\^=12
|
|
|
4932 \catcode`\_=12
|
|
|
4933 \catcode`\|=12
|
|
|
4934 \catcode`\<=12
|
|
|
4935 \catcode`\>=12
|
|
|
4936 \catcode`\+=12
|
|
|
4937 \catcode`\@=12
|
|
|
4938 \catcode`\\=12}
|
|
|
4939
|
|
|
4940 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
|
|
4941 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
|
|
4942 % where N is the macro parameter number.
|
|
|
4943 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
|
|
4944 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
|
|
4945
|
|
|
4946 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
|
|
4947 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
|
|
4948 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
|
|
4949 }
|
|
|
4950 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
|
|
4951
|
|
|
4952 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|
|
4953 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|
|
4954
|
|
|
4955 \def\macroxxx#1{%
|
|
|
4956 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
|
|
4957 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
|
|
4958 \paramno=0%
|
|
|
4959 \else
|
|
|
4960 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
|
|
4961 \fi
|
|
|
4962 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
|
|
4963 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
|
|
4964 \else
|
|
|
4965 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
|
|
4966 \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
|
|
|
4967 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
|
|
4968 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
|
|
4969 % Add the macroname to \macrolist
|
|
|
4970 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
|
|
|
4971 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
|
|
|
4972 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
|
|
|
4973 \fi
|
|
|
4974 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
|
|
4975 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
|
|
4976 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
|
|
4977 \fi}
|
|
|
4978
|
|
|
4979 \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
|
|
|
4980 \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
|
|
|
4981 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
|
|
4982 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
|
|
4983 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
|
|
4984 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
|
|
|
4985 \begingroup
|
|
|
4986 \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
|
|
|
4987 \def\do##1{%
|
|
|
4988 \def\tempb{##1}%
|
|
|
4989 \ifx\tempa\tempb
|
|
|
4990 % remove this
|
|
|
4991 \else
|
|
|
4992 \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
|
|
|
4993 \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
|
|
|
4994 \fi}%
|
|
|
4995 \def\newmacrolist{}%
|
|
|
4996 % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
|
|
|
4997 \macrolist
|
|
|
4998 \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
|
|
|
4999 \endgroup
|
|
|
5000 \else
|
|
|
5001 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
|
|
5002 \fi
|
|
|
5003 }
|
|
|
5004
|
|
|
5005 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
|
|
5006 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
|
|
5007 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
|
|
5008 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
|
|
5009 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
|
|
5010 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
|
|
5011 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
|
|
5012
|
|
|
5013 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
|
|
5014 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
|
|
5015 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
|
|
5016 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
|
|
5017
|
|
|
5018 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
|
|
5019 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
|
|
5020 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
|
|
5021 % it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
|
|
5022 %
|
|
|
5023 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
|
|
5024 % the macro is used.
|
|
|
5025
|
|
|
5026 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
|
|
5027 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
|
|
5028 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
|
|
5029 \if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
|
|
5030 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
|
|
5031 \advance\paramno by 1%
|
|
|
5032 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
|
|
5033 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
|
|
5034 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
|
|
5035 \fi\next}
|
|
|
5036
|
|
|
5037 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
|
|
5038 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
|
|
5039
|
|
|
5040 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
|
|
5041 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
|
|
5042 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
|
|
5043 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
|
|
5044
|
|
|
5045 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
|
|
5046 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
|
|
5047 % Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
|
|
5048 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
|
|
5049 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
|
|
5050 \def\defmacro{%
|
|
|
5051 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
|
|
5052 \ifrecursive
|
|
|
5053 \ifcase\paramno
|
|
|
5054 % 0
|
|
|
5055 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
|
5056 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|
|
5057 \or % 1
|
|
|
5058 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
|
5059 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
|
5060 \noexpand\braceorline
|
|
|
5061 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
|
|
5062 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
|
5063 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|
|
5064 \else % many
|
|
|
5065 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
|
5066 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
|
5067 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
|
|
5068 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
|
5069 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
|
|
5070 \expandafter\expandafter
|
|
|
5071 \expandafter\xdef
|
|
|
5072 \expandafter\expandafter
|
|
|
5073 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
|
|
5074 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|
|
5075 \fi
|
|
|
5076 \else
|
|
|
5077 \ifcase\paramno
|
|
|
5078 % 0
|
|
|
5079 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
|
5080 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|
|
5081 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|
|
5082 \or % 1
|
|
|
5083 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
|
5084 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
|
5085 \noexpand\braceorline
|
|
|
5086 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
|
|
5087 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
|
5088 \egroup
|
|
|
5089 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|
|
5090 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|
|
5091 \else % many
|
|
|
5092 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
|
5093 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
|
5094 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
|
|
5095 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
|
5096 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
|
|
5097 \expandafter\expandafter
|
|
|
5098 \expandafter\xdef
|
|
|
5099 \expandafter\expandafter
|
|
|
5100 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
|
|
5101 \paramlist{%
|
|
|
5102 \egroup
|
|
|
5103 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|
|
5104 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|
|
5105 \fi
|
|
|
5106 \fi}
|
|
|
5107
|
|
|
5108 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
|
|
5109
|
|
|
5110 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
|
|
5111 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
|
|
5112 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
|
|
5113 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
|
|
5114 \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
|
|
5115 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
|
|
5116 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
|
|
5117 \expandafter\parsearg
|
|
|
5118 \fi \next}
|
|
|
5119
|
|
|
5120 % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
|
|
|
5121 % expanded by \write.
|
|
|
5122 \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
|
|
|
5123 \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
|
|
|
5124
|
|
|
5125
|
|
|
5126 % @alias.
|
|
|
5127 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
|
|
5128 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
|
|
5129 \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
|
|
|
5130 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
|
|
5131 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
|
|
|
5132 \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
|
|
|
5133 \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
|
|
|
5134 \expandafter\endgroup\next}
|
|
|
5135
|
|
|
5136
|
|
|
5137 \message{cross references,}
|
|
|
5138 % @xref etc.
|
|
|
5139
|
|
|
5140 \newwrite\auxfile
|
|
|
5141
|
|
|
5142 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
|
|
5143 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
|
|
5144
|
|
|
5145 % @inforef is relatively simple.
|
|
|
5146 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
|
|
5147 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
|
|
5148 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
|
|
5149
|
|
|
5150 % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
|
|
|
5151 \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
|
|
|
5152 \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
|
|
|
5153 \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
|
|
5154 \let\nwnode=\node
|
|
|
5155 \let\lastnode=\relax
|
|
|
5156
|
|
|
5157 % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
|
|
|
5158 \def\donoderef{%
|
|
|
5159 \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
|
|
5160 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
|
|
|
5161 {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
|
|
|
5162 \global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
|
|
5163 \fi
|
|
|
5164 }
|
|
|
5165 \def\unnumbnoderef{%
|
|
|
5166 \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
|
|
5167 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
|
|
|
5168 \global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
|
|
5169 \fi
|
|
|
5170 }
|
|
|
5171 \def\appendixnoderef{%
|
|
|
5172 \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
|
|
5173 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
|
|
|
5174 {Yappendixletterandtype}%
|
|
|
5175 \global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
|
|
5176 \fi
|
|
|
5177 }
|
|
|
5178
|
|
|
5179
|
|
|
5180 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
|
|
5181 %
|
|
|
5182 \newcount\savesfregister
|
|
|
5183 \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
|
|
5184 \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
|
|
5185 \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
|
|
5186
|
|
|
5187 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
|
|
|
5188 % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
|
|
|
5189 % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
|
|
|
5190 % aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
|
|
|
5191 % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
|
|
|
5192 %
|
|
|
5193 \def\setref#1#2{{%
|
|
|
5194 \indexdummies
|
|
|
5195 \pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
|
|
5196 \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
|
|
|
5197 \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
|
|
|
5198 \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
|
|
|
5199 }}
|
|
|
5200
|
|
|
5201 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
|
|
5202 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
|
|
5203 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
|
|
5204 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
|
|
5205 %
|
|
|
5206 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
|
5207 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
|
5208 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
|
5209 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
|
|
5210 \unsepspaces
|
|
|
5211 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
|
|
5212 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|
|
5213 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
|
|
|
5214 \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
|
|
|
5215 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
|
|
5216 % No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
|
|
5217 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
5218 % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
|
|
5219 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
|
5220 \else
|
|
|
5221 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
|
|
5222 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
|
|
5223 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|
|
5224 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
|
|
5225 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
|
5226 \else
|
|
|
5227 \ifhavexrefs
|
|
|
5228 % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
|
|
5229 \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
|
|
5230 \else
|
|
|
5231 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
|
|
5232 \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
|
5233 \fi%
|
|
|
5234 \fi
|
|
|
5235 \fi
|
|
|
5236 \fi
|
|
|
5237 %
|
|
|
5238 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
|
|
5239 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
|
|
5240 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
|
|
5241 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
|
|
5242 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
|
|
5243 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
|
|
5244 \ifpdf
|
|
|
5245 \leavevmode
|
|
|
5246 \getfilename{#4}%
|
|
|
5247 \ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
|
|
5248 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|
|
5249 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}%
|
|
|
5250 \else
|
|
|
5251 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|
|
5252 goto name{#1@}%
|
|
|
5253 \fi
|
|
|
5254 \linkcolor
|
|
|
5255 \fi
|
|
|
5256 %
|
|
|
5257 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|
|
5258 \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
|
|
5259 \else
|
|
|
5260 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
|
|
5261 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
|
|
5262 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
|
|
5263 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
|
|
5264 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
|
|
5265 {\normalturnoffactive
|
|
|
5266 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
|
|
5267 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
|
|
5268 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
|
|
5269 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
|
|
5270 }%
|
|
|
5271 % [mynode],
|
|
|
5272 [\printednodename],\space
|
|
|
5273 % page 3
|
|
|
5274 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
|
|
5275 \fi
|
|
|
5276 \endlink
|
|
|
5277 \endgroup}
|
|
|
5278
|
|
|
5279 % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
|
|
|
5280
|
|
|
5281 % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
|
|
|
5282 % and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
|
|
|
5283 \def\dosetq#1#2{%
|
|
|
5284 {\let\folio=0%
|
|
|
5285 \normalturnoffactive
|
|
|
5286 \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
|
|
|
5287 \iflinks
|
|
|
5288 \next
|
|
|
5289 \fi
|
|
|
5290 }%
|
|
|
5291 }
|
|
|
5292
|
|
|
5293 % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
|
|
|
5294 % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
|
|
|
5295 % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
|
|
|
5296
|
|
|
5297 \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
|
|
|
5298
|
|
|
5299 % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
|
|
|
5300
|
|
|
5301 \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
|
|
|
5302
|
|
|
5303 \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
|
|
|
5304
|
|
|
5305 \def\Ynothing{}
|
|
|
5306
|
|
|
5307 \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
|
|
|
5308 \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
|
|
|
5309 \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
|
|
|
5310 \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
|
|
5311 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
|
|
5312 \else %
|
|
|
5313 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
|
|
5314 \fi \fi \fi }
|
|
|
5315
|
|
|
5316 \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
|
|
|
5317 \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
|
|
|
5318 \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
|
|
|
5319 \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
|
|
5320 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
|
|
5321 \else %
|
|
|
5322 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
|
|
5323 \fi \fi \fi }
|
|
|
5324
|
|
|
5325 \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
|
|
|
5326
|
|
|
5327 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
|
|
5328 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
|
|
5329 %
|
|
|
5330 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
|
|
5331 \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
|
|
|
5332 \else
|
|
|
5333 \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
|
|
5334 \fi
|
|
|
5335
|
|
|
5336 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
|
|
5337 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
|
|
5338
|
|
|
5339 \def\refx#1#2{%
|
|
|
5340 \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
|
5341 % If not defined, say something at least.
|
|
|
5342 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
|
|
5343 \iflinks
|
|
|
5344 \ifhavexrefs
|
|
|
5345 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
|
|
5346 \else
|
|
|
5347 \ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
|
|
5348 \global\warnedxrefstrue
|
|
|
5349 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
|
|
5350 \fi
|
|
|
5351 \fi
|
|
|
5352 \fi
|
|
|
5353 \else
|
|
|
5354 % It's defined, so just use it.
|
|
|
5355 \csname X#1\endcsname
|
|
|
5356 \fi
|
|
|
5357 #2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
|
|
5358 }
|
|
|
5359
|
|
|
5360 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
|
|
|
5361 %
|
|
|
5362 \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
|
|
|
5363 % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
|
|
|
5364 \catcode`\\ = 0
|
|
|
5365 \afterassignment\endgroup
|
|
|
5366 \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
|
|
|
5367 }
|
|
|
5368
|
|
|
5369 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
|
|
5370 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
|
|
|
5371 \catcode`\^^@=\other
|
|
|
5372 \catcode`\^^A=\other
|
|
|
5373 \catcode`\^^B=\other
|
|
|
5374 \catcode`\^^C=\other
|
|
|
5375 \catcode`\^^D=\other
|
|
|
5376 \catcode`\^^E=\other
|
|
|
5377 \catcode`\^^F=\other
|
|
|
5378 \catcode`\^^G=\other
|
|
|
5379 \catcode`\^^H=\other
|
|
|
5380 \catcode`\^^K=\other
|
|
|
5381 \catcode`\^^L=\other
|
|
|
5382 \catcode`\^^N=\other
|
|
|
5383 \catcode`\^^P=\other
|
|
|
5384 \catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
|
|
5385 \catcode`\^^R=\other
|
|
|
5386 \catcode`\^^S=\other
|
|
|
5387 \catcode`\^^T=\other
|
|
|
5388 \catcode`\^^U=\other
|
|
|
5389 \catcode`\^^V=\other
|
|
|
5390 \catcode`\^^W=\other
|
|
|
5391 \catcode`\^^X=\other
|
|
|
5392 \catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
|
|
5393 \catcode`\^^[=\other
|
|
|
5394 \catcode`\^^\=\other
|
|
|
5395 \catcode`\^^]=\other
|
|
|
5396 \catcode`\^^^=\other
|
|
|
5397 \catcode`\^^_=\other
|
|
|
5398 \catcode`\@=\other
|
|
|
5399 \catcode`\^=\other
|
|
|
5400 % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
|
|
5401 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
|
|
5402 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
|
|
5403 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
|
|
5404 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
|
|
5405 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
|
|
5406 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
|
|
5407 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
|
|
5408 %
|
|
|
5409 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
|
|
5410 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
|
|
5411 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
|
|
5412 %
|
|
|
5413 \catcode`\~=\other
|
|
|
5414 \catcode`\[=\other
|
|
|
5415 \catcode`\]=\other
|
|
|
5416 \catcode`\"=\other
|
|
|
5417 \catcode`\_=\other
|
|
|
5418 \catcode`\|=\other
|
|
|
5419 \catcode`\<=\other
|
|
|
5420 \catcode`\>=\other
|
|
|
5421 \catcode`\$=\other
|
|
|
5422 \catcode`\#=\other
|
|
|
5423 \catcode`\&=\other
|
|
|
5424 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
|
|
5425 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
|
|
|
5426 {%
|
|
|
5427 \count 1=128
|
|
|
5428 \def\loop{%
|
|
|
5429 \catcode\count 1=\other
|
|
|
5430 \advance\count 1 by 1
|
|
|
5431 \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
|
|
|
5432 }%
|
|
|
5433 }%
|
|
|
5434 % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
|
|
|
5435 % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
|
|
|
5436 % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
|
|
|
5437 % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
|
|
|
5438 % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
|
|
|
5439 % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
|
|
|
5440 \catcode`\{=1
|
|
|
5441 \catcode`\}=2
|
|
|
5442 \catcode`\%=\other
|
|
|
5443 \catcode`\'=0
|
|
|
5444 \catcode`\\=\other
|
|
|
5445 %
|
|
|
5446 \openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
|
|
5447 \ifeof 1 \else
|
|
|
5448 \closein 1
|
|
|
5449 \input \jobname.aux
|
|
|
5450 \global\havexrefstrue
|
|
|
5451 \global\warnedobstrue
|
|
|
5452 \fi
|
|
|
5453 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
|
|
5454 \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
|
|
5455 \endgroup}
|
|
|
5456
|
|
|
5457
|
|
|
5458 % Footnotes.
|
|
|
5459
|
|
|
5460 \newcount \footnoteno
|
|
|
5461
|
|
|
5462 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
|
|
5463 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
|
|
5464 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
|
|
5465 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
|
|
5466 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
|
|
5467 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
|
|
5468
|
|
|
5469 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
|
|
5470 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
|
|
5471
|
|
|
5472 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
|
|
5473
|
|
|
5474 {\catcode `\@=11
|
|
|
5475 %
|
|
|
5476 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
|
|
5477 \gdef\footnote{%
|
|
|
5478 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
|
|
5479 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
|
|
5480 %
|
|
|
5481 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
|
|
5482 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
|
|
5483 \let\@sf\empty
|
|
|
5484 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
|
|
|
5485 %
|
|
|
5486 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
|
|
5487 \unskip
|
|
|
5488 \thisfootno\@sf
|
|
|
5489 \footnotezzz
|
|
|
5490 }%
|
|
|
5491
|
|
|
5492 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
|
|
5493 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
|
|
5494 %
|
|
|
5495 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
|
|
|
5496 % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
|
|
5497 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
|
|
5498 %
|
|
|
5499 \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
|
|
|
5500 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
|
|
5501 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
|
|
5502 % So reset some parameters.
|
|
|
5503 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
|
|
5504 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
|
|
5505 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
|
|
5506 \floatingpenalty\@MM
|
|
|
5507 \leftskip\z@skip
|
|
|
5508 \rightskip\z@skip
|
|
|
5509 \spaceskip\z@skip
|
|
|
5510 \xspaceskip\z@skip
|
|
|
5511 \parindent\defaultparindent
|
|
|
5512 %
|
|
|
5513 \smallfonts \rm
|
|
|
5514 %
|
|
|
5515 % Hang the footnote text off the number.
|
|
|
5516 \hang
|
|
|
5517 \textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
|
|
5518 %
|
|
|
5519 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
|
|
5520 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
|
|
5521 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
|
|
5522 \footstrut
|
|
|
5523 \futurelet\next\fo@t
|
|
|
5524 }
|
|
|
5525 \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
|
|
|
5526 \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
|
|
|
5527 \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
|
|
|
5528 \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
|
|
|
5529 \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
|
|
|
5530
|
|
|
5531 }%end \catcode `\@=11
|
|
|
5532
|
|
|
5533 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
|
|
5534 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
|
|
5535 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
|
|
5536 %
|
|
|
5537 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
|
|
5538 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
|
|
5539 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
|
|
5540 %
|
|
|
5541 \def\setleading#1{%
|
|
|
5542 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
|
|
|
5543 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
|
|
5544 \normalbaselines
|
|
|
5545 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
|
|
5546 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
|
|
5547 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
|
|
5548 }%
|
|
|
5549 }
|
|
|
5550
|
|
|
5551 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
|
|
5552 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
|
|
5553 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
|
|
5554 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
|
|
5555 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
|
|
5556 %
|
|
|
5557 \def\|{%
|
|
|
5558 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
|
|
5559 \leavevmode
|
|
|
5560 %
|
|
|
5561 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
|
|
5562 \vadjust{%
|
|
|
5563 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
|
|
5564 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
|
|
5565 \vskip-\baselineskip
|
|
|
5566 %
|
|
|
5567 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
|
|
5568 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
|
|
5569 \llap{%
|
|
|
5570 %
|
|
|
5571 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
|
|
5572 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
|
|
5573 %
|
|
|
5574 % This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
|
|
5575 \hskip 12pt
|
|
|
5576 }%
|
|
|
5577 }%
|
|
|
5578 }
|
|
|
5579
|
|
|
5580 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
|
|
5581 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
|
|
5582 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
|
|
5583 %
|
|
|
5584 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
|
|
5585
|
|
|
5586 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
|
|
5587 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
|
|
5588 %
|
|
|
5589 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
|
|
5590 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
|
|
5591 % undone and the next image would fail.
|
|
|
5592 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
|
|
5593 \ifeof 1 \else
|
|
|
5594 \closein 1
|
|
|
5595 % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
|
|
|
5596 % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
|
|
|
5597 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
|
|
5598 \input epsf.tex
|
|
|
5599 \fi
|
|
|
5600 %
|
|
|
5601 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
|
|
5602 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
|
|
5603 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
|
|
5604 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
|
|
5605 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
|
|
5606 %
|
|
|
5607 \def\image#1{%
|
|
|
5608 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
|
|
5609 \ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
|
|
5610 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
|
|
5611 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
|
|
5612 \global\warnednoepsftrue
|
|
|
5613 \fi
|
|
|
5614 \else
|
|
|
5615 \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
|
|
|
5616 \fi
|
|
|
5617 }
|
|
|
5618 %
|
|
|
5619 % Arguments to @image:
|
|
|
5620 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
|
|
5621 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
|
|
5622 % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
|
|
5623 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
|
|
5624 \ifpdf
|
|
|
5625 \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
|
|
|
5626 \else
|
|
|
5627 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
|
|
5628 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|
|
5629 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
|
|
5630 \begingroup
|
|
|
5631 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
|
|
5632 % If the image is by itself, center it.
|
|
|
5633 \ifvmode
|
|
|
5634 \nobreak\bigskip
|
|
|
5635 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
|
|
5636 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
|
|
5637 % above and below.
|
|
|
5638 \nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
|
|
5639 \nobreak
|
|
|
5640 \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
|
|
|
5641 \bigbreak
|
|
|
5642 \else
|
|
|
5643 % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
|
|
|
5644 \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
|
|
5645 \fi
|
|
|
5646 \endgroup
|
|
|
5647 \fi
|
|
|
5648 }
|
|
|
5649
|
|
|
5650
|
|
|
5651 \message{localization,}
|
|
|
5652 % and i18n.
|
|
|
5653
|
|
|
5654 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
|
|
|
5655 % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
|
|
|
5656 % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
|
|
|
5657 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
|
|
|
5658 %
|
|
|
5659 \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
|
|
|
5660 \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
|
|
|
5661 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
|
|
5662 % Read the file if it exists.
|
|
|
5663 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
|
|
5664 \ifeof1
|
|
|
5665 \errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
|
|
5666 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
|
|
5667 \let\temp = \relax
|
|
|
5668 \else
|
|
|
5669 \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
|
|
|
5670 \fi
|
|
|
5671 \temp
|
|
|
5672 \endgroup
|
|
|
5673 }
|
|
|
5674 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
|
|
5675 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
|
|
|
5676 should work if nowhere else does.}
|
|
|
5677
|
|
|
5678
|
|
|
5679 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
|
|
|
5680 % likely, but for now just recognize it.
|
|
|
5681 \let\documentencoding = \comment
|
|
|
5682
|
|
|
5683
|
|
|
5684 % Page size parameters.
|
|
|
5685 %
|
|
|
5686 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
|
|
5687
|
|
|
5688 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
5689 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
5690 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
5691
|
|
|
5692 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
|
|
5693 \vbadness = 10000
|
|
|
5694
|
|
|
5695 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
|
|
5696 \hbadness = 2000
|
|
|
5697
|
|
|
5698 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
|
|
|
5699 \widowpenalty=10000
|
|
|
5700 \clubpenalty=10000
|
|
|
5701
|
|
|
5702 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
|
|
5703 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
|
|
5704 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
|
|
5705 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
|
|
5706 %
|
|
|
5707 \def\setemergencystretch{%
|
|
|
5708 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
|
|
5709 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
|
|
5710 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
|
|
5711 \else
|
|
|
5712 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
|
|
5713 \fi
|
|
|
5714 }
|
|
|
5715
|
|
|
5716 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
|
|
|
5717 % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can
|
|
|
5718 % set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
|
|
|
5719 %
|
|
|
5720 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
|
|
5721 \voffset = #3\relax
|
|
|
5722 \topskip = #6\relax
|
|
|
5723 \splittopskip = \topskip
|
|
|
5724 %
|
|
|
5725 \vsize = #1\relax
|
|
|
5726 \advance\vsize by \topskip
|
|
|
5727 \outervsize = \vsize
|
|
|
5728 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
|
|
5729 \pageheight = \vsize
|
|
|
5730 %
|
|
|
5731 \hsize = #2\relax
|
|
|
5732 \outerhsize = \hsize
|
|
|
5733 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
|
|
5734 \pagewidth = \hsize
|
|
|
5735 %
|
|
|
5736 \normaloffset = #4\relax
|
|
|
5737 \bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
|
|
5738 %
|
|
|
5739 \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|
|
5740 \setemergencystretch
|
|
|
5741 }
|
|
|
5742
|
|
|
5743 % @letterpaper (the default).
|
|
|
5744 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
|
5745 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
|
5746 \setleading{13.2pt}%
|
|
|
5747 %
|
|
|
5748 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
|
|
5749 \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
|
|
5750 }}
|
|
|
5751
|
|
|
5752 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
|
|
|
5753 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
|
5754 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
|
|
5755 \setleading{12pt}%
|
|
|
5756 %
|
|
|
5757 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
|
|
5758 %
|
|
|
5759 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
|
|
5760 \tolerance = 700
|
|
|
5761 \hfuzz = 1pt
|
|
|
5762 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|
|
5763 \deftypemargin = 0pt
|
|
|
5764 \defbodyindent = .5cm
|
|
|
5765 %
|
|
|
5766 \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
|
|
|
5767 \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
|
|
|
5768 \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
|
|
|
5769 \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
|
|
|
5770 }}
|
|
|
5771
|
|
|
5772 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
|
|
5773 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
|
5774 \setleading{12pt}%
|
|
|
5775 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
|
5776 %
|
|
|
5777 \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
|
|
5778 %
|
|
|
5779 \tolerance = 700
|
|
|
5780 \hfuzz = 1pt
|
|
|
5781 }}
|
|
|
5782
|
|
|
5783 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
|
|
|
5784 % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
|
|
|
5785 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
|
5786 \setleading{13.6pt}%
|
|
|
5787 %
|
|
|
5788 \afourpaper
|
|
|
5789 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
|
|
|
5790 %
|
|
|
5791 \globaldefs = 0
|
|
|
5792 }}
|
|
|
5793
|
|
|
5794 % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
|
|
|
5795 \def\afourwide{%
|
|
|
5796 \afourpaper
|
|
|
5797 \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
|
|
5798 %
|
|
|
5799 \globaldefs = 0
|
|
|
5800 }
|
|
|
5801
|
|
|
5802 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
|
|
5803 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
|
|
5804 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
|
|
5805 %
|
|
|
5806 \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
|
|
|
5807 \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
|
|
5808 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
|
|
5809 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|
|
5810 \globaldefs = 1
|
|
|
5811 %
|
|
|
5812 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
|
5813 \setleading{13.2pt}%
|
|
|
5814 %
|
|
|
5815 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
|
|
5816 }}
|
|
|
5817
|
|
|
5818 % Set default to letter.
|
|
|
5819 %
|
|
|
5820 \letterpaper
|
|
|
5821
|
|
|
5822
|
|
|
5823 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
|
|
5824
|
|
|
5825 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
|
|
5826 \catcode`\"=\other
|
|
|
5827 \catcode`\~=\other
|
|
|
5828 \catcode`\^=\other
|
|
|
5829 \catcode`\_=\other
|
|
|
5830 \catcode`\|=\other
|
|
|
5831 \catcode`\<=\other
|
|
|
5832 \catcode`\>=\other
|
|
|
5833 \catcode`\+=\other
|
|
|
5834 \catcode`\$=\other
|
|
|
5835 \def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
|
|
5836 \def\normaltilde{~}
|
|
|
5837 \def\normalcaret{^}
|
|
|
5838 \def\normalunderscore{_}
|
|
|
5839 \def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
|
|
5840 \def\normalless{<}
|
|
|
5841 \def\normalgreater{>}
|
|
|
5842 \def\normalplus{+}
|
|
|
5843 \def\normaldollar{$}
|
|
|
5844
|
|
|
5845 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
|
|
|
5846 % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
|
|
|
5847 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
|
|
5848 %
|
|
|
5849 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
|
|
5850 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
|
|
5851 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
|
|
5852 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
|
|
5853 %
|
|
|
5854 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|
|
5855
|
|
|
5856 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
|
|
5857 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
|
|
5858 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
|
|
5859 % this is not a problem.
|
|
|
5860 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|
|
5861
|
|
|
5862 % Turn off all special characters except @
|
|
|
5863 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
|
|
5864 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
|
|
5865 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
|
|
5866
|
|
|
5867 \catcode`\"=\active
|
|
|
5868 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
|
|
5869 \let"=\activedoublequote
|
|
|
5870 \catcode`\~=\active
|
|
|
5871 \def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
|
|
5872 \chardef\hat=`\^
|
|
|
5873 \catcode`\^=\active
|
|
|
5874 \def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
|
|
5875
|
|
|
5876 \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
|
5877 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
|
|
5878 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
|
|
5879 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
|
|
|
5880
|
|
|
5881 \catcode`\|=\active
|
|
|
5882 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
|
|
5883 \chardef \less=`\<
|
|
|
5884 \catcode`\<=\active
|
|
|
5885 \def<{{\tt \less}}
|
|
|
5886 \chardef \gtr=`\>
|
|
|
5887 \catcode`\>=\active
|
|
|
5888 \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
|
|
5889 \catcode`\+=\active
|
|
|
5890 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
|
|
5891 \catcode`\$=\active
|
|
|
5892 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}
|
|
|
5893 %\catcode 27=\active
|
|
|
5894 %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
|
|
|
5895
|
|
|
5896 % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
|
|
|
5897 {\catcode`\==\active
|
|
|
5898 \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
|
|
|
5899
|
|
|
5900 \catcode`+=\active
|
|
|
5901 \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
|
5902
|
|
|
5903 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
|
|
5904 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
|
|
5905 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
|
|
5906 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
|
|
5907 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
|
|
5908
|
|
|
5909 \catcode`\@=0
|
|
|
5910
|
|
|
5911 % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
|
|
|
5912 \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
|
|
|
5913 %{\catcode`\\=\other
|
|
|
5914 %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
|
|
|
5915
|
|
|
5916 % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
|
|
|
5917 {\catcode`\\=\active
|
|
|
5918 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
|
|
|
5919
|
|
|
5920 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
|
|
|
5921 \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
|
|
|
5922
|
|
|
5923 % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
|
|
|
5924 \catcode`\\=\active
|
|
|
5925
|
|
|
5926 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
|
|
|
5927 % even after parsing them.
|
|
|
5928 @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
|
|
5929 @let\=@realbackslash
|
|
|
5930 @let~=@normaltilde
|
|
|
5931 @let^=@normalcaret
|
|
|
5932 @let_=@normalunderscore
|
|
|
5933 @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
|
|
5934 @let<=@normalless
|
|
|
5935 @let>=@normalgreater
|
|
|
5936 @let+=@normalplus
|
|
|
5937 @let$=@normaldollar}
|
|
|
5938
|
|
|
5939 @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
|
|
5940 @let\=@normalbackslash
|
|
|
5941 @let~=@normaltilde
|
|
|
5942 @let^=@normalcaret
|
|
|
5943 @let_=@normalunderscore
|
|
|
5944 @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
|
|
5945 @let<=@normalless
|
|
|
5946 @let>=@normalgreater
|
|
|
5947 @let+=@normalplus
|
|
|
5948 @let$=@normaldollar}
|
|
|
5949
|
|
|
5950 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
|
|
5951 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
|
|
5952 @otherifyactive
|
|
|
5953
|
|
|
5954 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
|
|
5955 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
|
|
5956 % a backslash.
|
|
|
5957 %
|
|
|
5958 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
|
|
5959 @global@let\ = @eatinput
|
|
|
5960
|
|
|
5961 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
|
|
5962 % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
|
|
5963 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
|
|
5964 % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
|
|
|
5965 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
|
|
5966 %
|
|
|
5967 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
|
|
5968 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
|
|
5969 @catcode`+=@active
|
|
|
5970 @catcode`@_=@active
|
|
|
5971 }
|
|
|
5972
|
|
|
5973 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
|
|
5974 @escapechar = `@@
|
|
|
5975
|
|
|
5976 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
|
|
5977 @catcode`@& = @other
|
|
|
5978 @catcode`@# = @other
|
|
|
5979 @catcode`@% = @other
|
|
|
5980
|
|
|
5981 @c Set initial fonts.
|
|
|
5982 @textfonts
|
|
|
5983 @rm
|
|
|
5984
|
|
|
5985
|
|
|
5986 @c Local variables:
|
|
|
5987 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
|
|
|
5988 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
|
|
5989 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
|
|
5990 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
|
|
5991 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
|
|
5992 @c End:
|
